southport middle school - southport hvac re… · double loop of tie wire. hanger wires may exceed...

SOUTHPORT MIDDLE SCHOOL OCI Project No. 17118Air Handling Unit Retrofit

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 05 23 Valves, Cocks and Specialties for Plumbing Systems22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment22 11 19 Domestic Cold Water Supply Piping22 13 16 Storm Water Piping22 13 17 Cleanouts and Cleanout Access Covers22 13 19 Floor Drains

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 01 00 General Mechanical Provisions23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods23 05 13 Electric Motors, Premium Efficiency Type23 05 15 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals23 05 16 Housekeeping Pads, Concrete23 05 18 Piping: Condensate Drain23 05 19 Gauges23 05 20 Piping Systems: Flushing and Cleaning23 05 21 Thermometers23 05 22 Flow Stations, Venturi Type23 05 23 Valves, Cocks and Specialties: HVAC Systems23 05 24 Air Control Equipment, Hydronic Systems23 05 29 Hangers and Supports23 05 48 Vibration Isolation Equipment23 05 53 Identification of Piping Systems and Equipment23 05 93 Performance Verification, Preliminary23 05 94 Performance Verification, Final23 07 00 Insulation, HVAC23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC23 09 23 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC23 09 25 Variable Frequency Drives23 21 13 Hydronic Piping23 21 15 Preinsulated Underground Piping System23 23 13 Refrigerant Pipe, Valves and Specialties23 31 00 Ductwork23 33 00 Duct System Accessories23 33 19 Sound Attenuators23 36 16 Terminal Units: VAV, Single Inlet, Electric Coil23 37 13 Air Distribution Devices23 37 24 Roof Air Intakes and Relief Vents23 37 25 Louvers23 43 24 Air Purification System23 54 17 Heating Coils: Electric Duct23 73 13 Air Handling Units, Central Station, Modular23 81 27 Air Handling Units, Split System


TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers26 24 16 Panelboards26 27 26 Wiring Devices26 28 13 Fuses26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers26 51 19 LED Interior Lighting

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00 - 1

SECTION 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Non-fire rated and fire-rated suspended metal grid system complete with wall trim.

B. Lay-in ceiling tile boards.

C. Related work indicated elsewhere:

1. Lighting Fixtures – Division 26.2. Air Conditioning – Division 23.

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Acoustical tile ceilings are recommended for classrooms, library, media center, administrative area, cafeteria, corridors, lobby and music room.

B. Acoustical tile ceilings are not recommended for rest rooms, food preparation area, scullery, gymnasium and janitors room.

C. In kitchen area ceilings shall be of vinyl rock and all grid work shall be for high moisture areas.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable but not limited to:

1. Ceiling Tile:

a. CelotexVantage-PVN 197

2. Metal Grids:

a. Chicago Metallic Corporationb. Donn Products, Incorporatedc. Flangeklamp Corporation

3. Equivalent products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in the contract conditions.

B. Contractor’s Qualifications: Contractor shall have minimum, five (5) years experience in installation of acoustical ceilings. Contractor shall be certified in writing by manufacturer of acoustical materials and suspension system.

C. Installer’s Qualifications: Journeyman installer shall have a minimum of four (4) years experience in installation of acoustical ceilings. Installer shall be certified in writing by manufacturer of acoustical materials and suspension system.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Data, Acoustical Ceilings: For information only, submit two copies of manufacturer’s product guidelines and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these guidelines. Distribute one additional copy of each installation instruction to the installer.

1. Submit three sets of 12 inch square samples for each acoustical unit required. In each set of samples show the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work. Sample submittal and Architect’s review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Florida Building Code 2001: FBC 804.

B. Acoustical Materials Association – AMA Bulletin (Latest edition).

1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in unopened packages and only when areas are in dry condition.

B. Protect from damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED SUSPENDED GRID CEILING SYSTEM

A. Exposed grid system should generally be 2 feet 0 inch by 2 feet 0 inch. Consisting of cold rolled, electro galvanized, steel not less than .017 inch thick. Exposed flanges should have a high-baked enamel finish – color white.

B. The following component descriptions and section numbers refer to Ropper Eastern component types, as a reference.

1. General:

a. Main Runners: Double web design with rectangular top, web height 1-1/2" and bottom flange 15/16/ inches. Cross tee holes 6" o.c. – hanger wire holes 12" o.c. as #7300 WA.

b. Cross Tees: As above except to be as #7340 WA.c. Wall Moldings: Moldings shall be minimum of 15/16" #7800-WA.d. Cap Moldings: Moldings shall be #7800-WA or #7804-WA as required by

existing conditions.

2.2 HANGER WIRES

A. No. 12 galvanized annealed steel. Secure to structure above.



2.3 TIE WIRES

A. No. 18 corrosion – resistant steel.

2.4 MINERAL FIBER ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Type #1 Mineral Fiber Acoustical Units should conform to the following guidelines which describe products manufactured by Armstrong:

1. Product Name:

a. Minaboard.b. Fire guard panels where indicated as one hour fire rated acoustical

ceiling.

2. Thickness – 5/8".3. Face dimension – 24" x 48" (nominal).4. Edge – square.5. Pattern – Coprtega.6. NRC Range - .50 - .60.7. STC Range – 35 – 39.8. Light reflection – 75% minimum.9. Noncombustibility:

a. Flame spread index of Class 25, according to Federal Specification SS-S-118a.

b. Flame spread range of 0.25, or Class A, according to ASTM E-84-70.

2.5 FIRE RESISTANCE RATING (where called for on drawings)

A. The ceiling system combined with the construction system, should have a fire rating of one hour minimum, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The detailed test method and criteria are described in the Standard Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials and ANSI A2.1. Fire rated assemblies should be complete in all respects including hold-down clips and protection at

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Entire installation should comply with guidelines, details, instruction, and recommendations of manufacturer as required to make a complete and satisfactory installation of acoustical products.

B. Space main runners accurately to fit acoustical units required. Space cross runners accurately and secure to main runners.

C. Install spring clips behind and above edge of each perimeter acoustical unit to hold it snug against unit and down on flange of wall molding. Runners should rest on wall molding at walls.



D. Install wall molding at intersection with walls, beams, girders and other vertical surfaces. Fit tightly into place to true level.

E. Provide indicated hangers of ample length, spaced not over four feet on centers along lines of main runner channels secure to overhead structure. Saddle-tie or wrap around main runner channels so as to prevent turning or twisting of runners and to develop full strength of hangers. Where metal A/C ducts (over 48" in width) prevent main runner channels from being hung directly from overhead structure, main runners may hang directly from bottom of duct by sheet metal clips or other accepted methods.

F. Hanger wires shall be arranged such that at least two (2) hanger wires are located around the perimeter of each light fixture.

G. Provide carrying channels on maximum 4 foot centers. Do not allow carrying channels to come in contact with or be let into abutting concrete or masonry walls or partitions.

H. Support ends of main runners at walls by hangers located not over 12" from each end. Butt runners at splices, interlock channel flanges and securely tie near each end with double loop of tie wire. Hanger wires may exceed 12" distance at walls provided that a minimum of one hanger wire is installed between the wall angle and the face of the first light fixture.

I. Make entire installation to proper heights, contours, etc., allowing for indicated finishing materials. Leaving tolerance: 1/8" in 12 feet each way.

3.2 ASSEMBLY DEVICES

A. The design of an dimensional tolerances set by the manufacturer for accessory items such as formed wire hangers, springs, spaces clips, tile retainers, and spacer bars should be such as to assure satisfactory performance of their intended function in the suspension system. Failure attributable to such accessories to control alignment, prevent undesirable rotation, or other unsatisfactory performance which results in unfavorable acoustical tile ceiling appearance, will be cause for their rejection.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Space to receive acoustical treatment should be dry and be satisfactorily closed against excessive traffic and be protected against weather before work is started.

B. Install acoustical units in a true and even plane, in straight line courses laid out as indicated.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently el8minate evidence of damage.



B. The installer should advise the Contractor of required protection for the acoustical ceilings, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION 09 51 00


VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS 22 05 23 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install valves, cocks and specialties as indicated on drawings or specified herein.

B. Valves, cocks and specialties may not be indicated in every instance on the drawings, but whether or not shown, all valves, cocks and check valves necessary to the proper operation of the system shall be furnished and installed by subcontractor in an approved manner and location. Pressure ratings given for valves are steam working pressure. Valves shall have rising stems except in locations where space is limited; in these locations non-rising stem valves of equal material and pressure class will be accepted.

C. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK

A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 22 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data for review before any work is commenced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER MAIN VALVES

A. Water main valves are to be AWWA approved, gate valve, double disc, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, flanged end, with 2" square wrench nut. Valve boxes are to be cast iron adjustable type for top flush with ground surface. Furnish a box for each underground valve shown on drawings.

Valves Valve BoxesMueller No. A2380-6 Alabama Pipe Co. E2602Stockham Fig. G-745 James B. Clow F2450Crane No. 462 Mueller H10360



2.2 BALL VALVES

A. 2-1/2- inches and smaller: Threaded or soldered ends, port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe diameter, class 125, two piece bronze body, bronze ball, bronze stem, teflon seat and seals. Acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Hammond, Jamesbury, Nibco, Stockham, and Walworth.

2.3 LAWN FAUCETS

A. Lawn Faucets to be rough nickel plate, lock shield compression stop with removable handle, solid flange, female connection, with 3/4 inch male threaded hose end with anti-syphon device.

1/2" Inlet 3/4" InletMueller Co. H-8297 H-8297Hammond 1000 1000Chicago Faucet 293 387

,OR.

B. Provide integral or separate stop for lawn faucet.

,OR.

C. Lawn Faucets shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

2.4 GATE VALVES (THREADED)

A. 3" and smaller threaded valves and 4" and smaller solder pattern valves, rising stem, iron wheel, rough brass body, solid wedge disc, screwed or union bonnet and finished gland nut - 150 psi class.

Threaded Pattern Soldered PatternCrane 431 - - -Powell 514S 1842SWalworth 56 - - -Lunkenheimer 2151 3150Stockham B-122 B-124

2.5 GATE VALVES (FLANGED)

A. 3-1/2" and larger; except for solder valves as noted above shall be flanged type with cast iron body, brass trim, brass seats, rising stem and iron wheel - 125 psi class.

Flanged PatternCrane 465-1/2Powell 1793Walworth 726FLunkenheimer 1430Stockham G-623or approved equivalent



2.6 CHECK VALVES (SWING)

A. Check valves 3" and smaller shall have a pressure rating of not less than 200 psi threaded pattern and 125 psi solder pattern, wye pattern swing check with rough brass body, finished gland nut and regrinding bronze disc.

B. Check valves larger than 3" shall be flanged pattern, 125 psi iron body swing check with renewable brass seat, disc and trim. Check valves on primary heating hot water or chilled water piping system shall be 200 psi WP brass or ferrosteel body swing check valves, with renewable brass seat, disc and trim.

Flanged Pattern125 psi 200 psi

Crane 373 39EPowell 559 576Walworth M-928F M-970FLunkenheimer 1790 323Stockham G-931 ---

2.7 CHECK VALVES (WAFER)

A. Check valves 3" and larger flanged pattern shall have a pressure rating of 125 psi, globe type body, semm. steel body, stainless steel spring, bronze disc and bronze seat ring.

Williams-Hager Figure 636APCO Series 600Mueller Nos. 105, 107, 109 and 113Metraflex Series 900

B. Check valves on primary hot water piping systems shall be 200 psi, globe type body, semi steel body, stainless steel spring, bronze disc and bronze seat.

2.8 COCKS

A. Provide tight shut off balancing cocks at locations indicated on drawings.

B. Cocks 2" and smaller, square head bronze cocks 125 psi class with check.

Crane 254Powell 955Walworth 554Lunkenheimer 454,or approved equal

C. Cocks over 2", lubricated plug valves with semi-steel body 175 psi class.

Screwed 2" and 3" Flanged 4" and overPowell F 2200 Powell F 2201Walworth 1700 Walworth 1700FACF R 1430 ACF R 1431or approved equivalent

D. Lubricated plug cocks over 6" shall have a geared or worm drive operator.



E. Lubricated plug cocks may be used in lieu of globe or gate valves on heating hot water or chilled water steel piping systems to facilitate installation of insulation. All 6" or smaller chilled water piping valves located above finished ceilings (unless located over drip pan), or below ceiling in a finished area of the building shall be lubricated plug cocks. Provide handle or operator for each valve.

2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves or throttling valves when indicated on the drawings.

1. Design working pressure and temperature 150 psig and 180oF.2. Materials of construction:

a. Body: Malleable or ductile ironb. Disc: Aluminum bronzec. Stem: 416 stainless steeld. Bushings: Bronzee. Seat: Compound 230 Buna N or as per manufacturer's recommendation for specific

service.f. Handle: Lever lock through 10" size, if valve is to be used for throttling service,

provide infinite adjustment throttle plate.

B. Valves used for the isolation of equipment or for future connections shall have flanged ends or flange unions to permit removal of equipment and/or piping with the valve remaining in service.

C. Acceptable manufacturers are Keystone, Center Line or Demco.

2.10 BACK FLOW PREVENTER (REDUCED PRESSURE)

A. 3/4" to 4" size; ASSE Std. 1013, AWWA Std. C-506; unit shall have all bronze construction, stainless steel internal parts, test cocks and suitable for 175 psi supply water pressure. Unit shall be furnished with factory mounted bronze inlet strainer, union and non-rising stem gate valves (on inlet and outlet). Watts Series 900 Beeco or approved equal.

B. 4" to 6" size; ASSE Std. 1013, AWWA Std. C-506; unit shall have iron body construction, epoxy coated internal water way, stainless steel internal parts, test cocks and stainless steel bolts. Unit shall be furnished with inlet strainer and non-rising stem gate valves (on inlet and outlet). Watts Series 900 Beeco or approved equal.

2.11 BACK FLOW PREVENTER (DOUBLE CHECK VALVE)

A. 3/4" to 2"; ASSE Std 1015, AWWA Std. C-506; unit shall have bronze body, stainless steel internal parts, test cocks and rubber seating check valves. Unit shall be furnished with factory mounted bronze inlet strainer, union, and non-rising stem gate valves (on inlet or outlet). Watts Series 700 Beeco, or approved equal.

B. 2-1/2" and 3"; ASSE Std. 1015, AWWA Std. C-506; unit shall have iron body, stainless steel internal parts, test cocks, and rubber seating check valves. Unit shall be furnished with flanged ends, factory mounted inlet strainer, union, stainless steel bolts and non-rising stem gate valves (on inlet and outlet). Watts Series 700 Beeco or approved equal.



2.12 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Epco Sales, Inc., 3204 Sackett Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio; Capitol Manufacturing & Supply Company, Columbus; Patrol Valve Company, Cleveland, Ohio, or approved equal.

2.13 FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE

A. American Brass Co., Mason Industries, Chicago Metal Hose Co., or approved equal, 300 psig WP design flexible metal hose constructed of brass with brass wire braid covering.

2.14 FLEXIBLE PLASTIC PIPE JOINTS

A. Resist-O-Flex Co., Mercer Rubber Co., La Favorite Co., or approved equal, multiple bellows, guides, and restraining bolts or blocking. Joints shall be rated at 150 psig and 220oF continuous service.

2.15 STEEL PIPING SYSTEM STRAINERS

A. Malleable or cast iron, 125 psig working pressure. Free area of strainer - not less than 300 per cent cross sectional area of pipe. Strainer mesh, perforation size, and pattern as follows:

Pipe Size Pattern Mesh or Perforation Diameterto 2 in. threaded wye 20 mesh

2 to 4 in. threaded wye 0.045 inch dia.5 to 10 in. flanged wye 0.125 inch dia.12 in. up flanged basket 0.125 inch dia.

2.16 COPPER PIPING SYSTEM STRAINERS

A. Copper piping system strainers solder pattern with removable bolted flange on strainer leg. Strainer 40 mesh bronze screen, with free area of screen at least 3 times cross sectional area of pipe.

2.17 ACCESS PANELS

A. Access panels (Milcor) Inland-Ryerson Construction Products Co., (Boico) Birmingham Ornamental Iron Co., or approved equal. Steel panels and frames shall be furnished with prime coat of rust inhibitor enamel. See plans for sizes (12 x 12) min.). Access panel styles as follows:

Milco BoicoFire rated 1-1/2 hr. B. Label 1-1/2 hr. B. Label

2.18 SAFETY VALVES

A. Safety Valves to be Manning, Maxwell & Moore, Watts Regulator, or Bell & Gossett Co., ASME rated as shown on the drawings and/or required by applicable codes.



B. Refrigerant Safety Valves in accordance with USASI Code for refrigeration apparatus, and pipe discharge outside building.

C. Protect water heaters with Watts, Beaton Cadwell or McDonnell Miller, combination automatic temperature and pressure relief valves (with manual lift lever). Relief capacity shall exceed input energy at 125 psig pressure and 210oF temperature.

2.19 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS (AAV)

A. Automatic Air Vents to be equal to:

(150 psig W.P) (75 psig W.P)Metraflex MV-15 Maid-O-Mist 7Crane Co. 976 Bell & Gossett 7Sarco 13W Hoffman 79Armstrong 1AV

2.20 MANUAL AIR VENTS (MAV)

A. Manual air vents shall be brass manual cock equal to Crane 700 series.

2.21 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water hammer arresters (shock stops) shall be equal to those manufactured by Josam Manufacturing Company, Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade, Inc., MIFAB or Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install valves and cocks in horizontal piping with the valve stem in the vertical upright position.

B. Install valves and cocks to provide adequate clearance to permit easy operation of the valve hand wheel and permit servicing of the valve packing.

*C. Provide blow down valve on 1-1/2" and larger strainers (except refrigerant piping). Use valve

not less than 1/2 strainer blow down outlet size.

3.2 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish adequate number of properly sized access panels (12" x 12" minimum size) to adequately service and maintain systems installed under each section of specifications.

B. Access panels shall be installed and painted under other divisions of these specifications. Exact panel location shall be designated by the subcontractor performing the work of this Section.

C. Access panels are not required in exposed grid or other types of readily removable ceilings.



D. Access panels shall not compromise the fire rating of the wall.

3.3 SAFETY VALVES

A. Safety valves to have valve spindle enclosure with gland seal to minimize leakage and manual lift lever to check discharge required. Cut discharge pipe from safety valve on a 45 degree angle, pipe to floor and direct toward or into floor drain (unless noted otherwise on the drawings).

3.4 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Install automatic air vents with inlet isolation cock at locations indicated on drawings and at high points of hot and chilled water piping systems. Pipe vent discharge to drain pan, plumbing trap or to outside of building.


A. Install water hammer arresters (shock stops) at the locations indicated on the plans and all branch lines serving quick closing valves and in accordance with size and placement recommendations given in Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201.

3.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Water service back flow preventers shall be installed above grade and in such a manner to prevent the discharge relief opening from becoming submerged by ground water. Provide suitable protection to prevent assembly from freezing.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Brady Corporation.b. Brimar Industries, Inc.c. Carlton Industries, LP.d. Champion America.e. Craftmark Pipe Markers.f. emedco.g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.h. LEM Products Inc.i. Marking Services, Inc.j. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black.4. Background Color: Yellow.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9462

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456943424












B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Brady Corporation.b. Brimar Industries, Inc.c. Carlton Industries, LP.d. Champion America.e. Craftmark Pipe Markers.f. emedco.g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.h. LEM Products Inc.i. Marking Services, Inc.j. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: Black.4. Background Color: Yellow.5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Brady Corporation.2. Brimar Industries, Inc.3. Carlton Industries, LP.4. Champion America.5. Craftmark Pipe Markers.6. emedco.7. LEM Products Inc.8. Marking Sevices Inc.9. National Marker Company.
























10. Seton Identification Products.11. Stranco, Inc.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: Black.

D. Background Color: Yellow.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.2. Brady Corporation.3. Brimar Industries, Inc.4. Carlton Industries, LP.5. Champion America.6. Craftmark Pipe Markers.7. emedco.8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.9. LEM Products Inc.10. Marking Sevices Inc.11. Seton Identification Products.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

















E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.2 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Architectural drawings and/or specifications.

B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air Piping:

a. Background: Safety blue.b. Letter Colors: White.

2. High-Pressure Compressed Air Piping:

a. Background: Safety blue.b. Letter Colors: White.

3. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green.



b. Letter Colors: White.

4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety black.b. Letter Color: White.



DOMESTIC COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING 22 11 19 - 1

SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. The work pertaining to this Division occurs within the confines of the building line, and within a boundary outside of the building line for a distance of five (5) feet, measured normal to the building line, or as indicated on the drawings.

B. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide valves and specialties as specified under additional Sections of this Specification.

2.2 PIPE

A. The following schedule covers materials unless otherwise specified under a particular System Section.

1. Copper K, ASTM B88.2. Copper tube, Type L, hard drawn, ASTM B 88.3. Brass pipe or tube, chrome plated.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: Malleable iron 150 lb. banded, galvanized to match pipe.



B. Copper Tube: Wrought or cast brass solder joint.

C. The 'T' drill extruded fitting method may not be used.

D. Service material shall be brass compression fittings-angle ball cocks, ball corporations, etc. Flared fittings are acceptable under controlled conditions.

2.4 PIPE JOINTS

A. Joints in copper piping shall be made with tin-antimony solder (95-5) and non-acid flux. Contractor shall furnish manufacturers literature documenting that the lead content (trace quantities) are within the guidelines of the local codes having jurisdiction as well as the Safe Drinking Water Act Amendment (SDWAA).

B. Joints in threaded piping shall be made with teflon tape or non hardening pipe compound (seal-tite).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The design drawings are generally diagrammatic. They do not show every bend, off-set, elbow or other fitting which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted. Careful coordination of the work is necessary to avoid conflicts.

B. Run all water lines parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

C. For piping requiring insulation, lay out and carefully install piping with sufficient clearances to permit proper application of the insulation. If the piping is such that a neat insulation job cannot be obtained with reasonable effort, the piping subcontractor shall relocate piping.

D. Separate underground water piping and building sewer with undisturbed or compacted earth at least 10' horizontally if installed at the same level or lower than the sewer. Where water piping is closer than 10' to a sewer, place the bottom of the water pipe at least 18" above the top of the sewer, or the sewer shall be encased in a concrete envelope as required by the Department of Health & Rehabilitative Services (State of Florida).

E. Minimum cover for exterior underground piping is three feet over insulation or conduit unless otherwise noted on plans. Carefully excavate trench to smooth finished surface; if cut is too deep, backfill with clean earth and hand tamp to compact bottom. Make depression at joints to receive flanges, collars, and couplings. Provide continuous support for pipe or conduit. Backfill to be clean earth, free of rocks and debris completely enveloping pipe or conduit on both sides and top to a minimum thickness of 6". Carefully hand tamp backfill in 6" layers until 24" has been deposited over pipe or conduit.

F. Place color coded 6" wide 0.004" thickness polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above all underground piping systems approximately 12" below finished grade. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters. Printed second line with type of service below. Yellow tape is to be used for water, (Print type of water on tape; i.e., domestic cold water.)



3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Vertical Piping shall be supported at its base and no greater than every story height.

B. Horizontal Piping (Suspended) shall be supported at not more than eight (8) foot intervals. Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging.

C. Supports shall be connected to the building structure not from other equipment, ducts or conduits.

3.3 JOINTING PIPE

A. All pipe lines shall be correctly aligned before joints are made.

B. Squarely cut pipe and properly ream to remove all constriction and burrs before making up the joints.

C. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-hardening pipe compound or tape on male threads only at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

D. Copper Tube: Ream all pipe after cutting squarely, clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings and tin end to be soldered. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

E. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extra strong nipples when length of unthreaded part of standard weight nipple is less than 1-1/2".

F. Run water supply main to point indicated on plans.


A. Water hammer arresters (shock stops) shall be installed at the locations on the plans and all branch lines serving quick closing valves and in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. Provide access panels so located to permit ease of service.

3.5 VALVES

A. Provide valves to isolate each riser, and branch line. See also Section 220523 for requirements.

3.6 REDUCERS

A. Screwed bushings are prohibited, except where available space prevents use of reducing couplings. Pipe reductions on horizontal, hot water piping shall be made with eccentric reducers. Top of hot water piping shall be flat for venting.



3.7 TESTS

A. Apply a water pressure test to all parts of the water supply system before the piping is concealed and before the fixtures and equipment are connected. Use a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psig or 150% of system operating pressure, applied to the system for a period of four hours. There shall be no leaks at any point in the system at this pressure.

B. Leave concealed work uncovered until required tests have been completed, but if necessary, make tests on portions of the work and those portions of the work may be concealed after being inspected and approved. Make repairs of defects that are discovered as a result of inspection or tests with new materials. Caulking, welding or other such sealing methods of screwed joints, cracks or holes will not be accepted. Repeat tests after defects have been eliminated.

C. Complete all field testing prior to insulation, wrapping and/or backfill.

3.8 STERILIZATION

A. As soon as the water piping has been thoroughly flushed out, sterilize the lines by introducing into them a solution of calcium hypochlorite or chloride of lime. Open and close all valves while system is being chlorinated. After the sterilizing agent has been applied for 24 hours, test for residual chlorine at the ends of the lines. If less than 10 parts per million is indicated, repeat the process. When tests show at least 10 parts per million of residual chlorine, flush out the system until all traces of the chemical used are removed. Make necessary connections to sterilized piping.

3.9 PIPE PROTECTIONS

A. Paint all uninsulated piping underground with two coats of asphaltic paint. (Manual wiping is not acceptable)

B. Wrap pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6 mil polylene film or 15 lb. felt.

C. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. felt.

D. Coat all exposed threads on galvanized steel pipe after assembly with two coats of zinc chromate. Remove pipe thread lubricants prior to applying paint.



STORM WATER PIPING 22 13 16 - 1

SECTION 22 13 16 - STORM WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. The work pertaining to this Division occurs within the confines of the building line, and within a boundary outside of the building line for a distance of five (5) feet, measured normal to the building line, or as indicated on the drawings.




1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. The following schedule covers materials unless otherwise specified under a particular System Section.

2.2 PIPE

A. Cast-iron soil pipe service weight, centrifugally cast, ANSI A112.5.1. 2" Through 15" size, bell and spigot joint.

B. Cast-iron soil pipe service weight, centrifugally cast, ANSI A112.5.1. 1-1/2" through 10" size, "non-hub" joint.

C. Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) 12" through 144" bell and spigot pattern with O-ring rubber gaskets, ASTM C76.

D. Copper type DWV.



E. Brass pipe or tube, chrome plated.

F. PVC Type DWV, ASTM D2665-78. 1-1/2" through 6" size.

2.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. For below ground soil waste and vent piping, use any of the following materials:

1. Storm (Refer to size limitation in Section 2.2):

a. Cast iron soil pipe service weight bell and spigot.b. PVC type DWV, ASTM D2665-78.c. Reinforced concrete pipe.

2.4 FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe:

1. Underground: Provide fittings of same weight and manufacture as pipe in which installed. Joints shall be bell and spigot push-on type neoprene gasket or "NO HUB" type conforming to CIPI Standard 301 unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2. Above ground and in buildings: "NO-HUB" type conforming to CIPI Standard 301 unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. Threaded Drainage Pipe: Cast-iron, recessed.

C. Copper DWV: Cast or wrought solder joint DWV drainage fittings.

D. PVC Type DWV: ASTM D-2665, NSF Seal of Approval, Solvent-cement joint.

2.5 PIPE JOINTS

A. Bell and spigot type joint shall be made with push-on compression type, neoprene gasket conforming to ASTM A-74.

B. No-hub type joints shall be constructed of 24 gage type 304 stainless steel, with gasket guides, type 304 stainless steel screw clamp, and matching neoprene (ASTM C-564) gasket that shall interlock with housing.

C. Joints in copper piping shall be made with tin-antimony solder (95-5) silver solder and non-acid flux.

D. Joints in threaded piping shall be made with teflon tape or non hardening pipe compound (Seal-tite).

2.6 VENT FLASHING

A. Furnish 4 lb. lead flashing, material as recommended by roofing system manufacturer, or copper pitch pans for all vents through the roof. Type of flashing used shall be compatible with piping material.



2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Below grade piping identification and warning tape shall be 0.004 inch thick polyethylene, printed with a continuous two line message. Tapes used for non magnetic piping materials shall have a metallic core. Acceptable manufacturer is Seton Name Plate Corporation or approved equal.

B. Above ground piping identification tape shall conform to ANSI and ASME A13.1 2007.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The design drawings are generally diagrammatic. They do not show every bend, off-set, elbow or other fitting which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted. Careful coordination of the work is necessary to avoid conflicts.

B. PVC piping, fittings and other PVC materials shall not be installed in air conditioning plenums or equipment rooms used as air conditioning plenums.

C. Joints and connections shall be made permanent and watertight.

D. Run piping to sewer connection point outside of building or as indicated on drawings.

E. Install 3" and larger horizontal soil and waste piping to 1/8" per foot slope. Piping 2" and smaller shall be installed at a slope of 1/4" per foot. Run horizontal vent lines to a minimum grade back to stacks and vertical vent lines as direct and free from bends as possible.

F. For piping requiring insulation, lay out and carefully install piping with sufficient clearances to permit proper application of the insulation. If the piping is such that a neat insulation job cannot be obtained with reasonable effort, the piping subcontractor shall relocate piping.

G. Separate underground water piping and building sewer with undisturbed or compacted earth at least 10' horizontally if installed at the same level or lower than the sewer. Where water piping is closer than 10' to a sewer, place the bottom of the water pipe at least 18" above the top of the sewer, or the sewer shall be encased in a concrete envelope as required by the Department of Health & Rehabilitative Services (State of Florida).

H. Minimum cover for exterior underground piping is three feet over conduit unless otherwise noted on plans. Carefully excavate trench to smooth finished surface; if cut is too deep, backfill with clean earth and hand tamp to compact bottom. Make depression at joints to receive bells, collars, and couplings. Provide continuous support for pipe or conduit. Backfill to be clean earth, free of rocks and debris completely enveloping pipe or conduit on both sides and top to a minimum thickness of 6". Carefully hand tamp backfill in 6" layers until 18" has been deposited over pipe or conduit.

I. Place color coded 6" wide 0.004" thickness polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above all underground piping systems approximately 12" below finished grade. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters. Printed second line with type of service below. Red tape is to be used for sewer, (Print type of water on tape; i.e., storm water.)



J. Where condensate piping is indicated, piping shall be extended to the nearest catch basin/yard drain. A cast iron back water valve shall be provided with epoxy-coated steel access housing.


A. Vertical Piping shall be supported at its base and no greater than every story height, not to exceed 20 foot intervals.

B. Horizontal Piping (Suspended) shall be supported at each bend; at not more than five (5) foot intervals; except that pipe exceeding five (5) feet in length may be supported at not more than ten (10) foot intervals. Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be made directly behind the bell or coupling, where possible, not near the center of the pipe.

C. Supports shall be connected to the building structure not from other equipment, ducts or conduits.

D. Horizontal pipe and fittings six inches and larger shall be suitably braced to prevent horizontal movement. This should be done at every branch opening or change of direction by the use of braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable method, to prevent movement.

E. Where components are suspended in excess of eighteen inches by means of non-rigid hangers, they should be suitably braced against movement horizontally, often called sway bracing.

3.3 LINE AND GRADE

A. Install gravity lines at uniform grade to low point after field verification of low point invert.

B. Run piping straight, plumb and grade in the direction indicated on the drawings.

3.4 JOINTING PIPE

A. All pipe lines shall be correctly aligned before joints are made.

B. Squarely cut pipe and properly ream to remove all constriction and burrs before making up the joints.

C. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-hardening pipe compound on male threads only at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

D. Copper Tube: Ream all pipe after cutting squarely, clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings and tin end to be soldered. Apply non-acid solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

E. Joining "NO-HUB" cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with recommended practices described by the coupling manufacturers.



F. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extra strong nipples when length of unthreaded part of standard weight nipple is less than 1-1/2".

G. Provide reducing fittings (reducing bushings shall not be used) where changes in pipe sizes occur.

H. Provide dielectric unions or flanges between copper and steel piping and between brassware and steel. Do not use steel and copper piping in the same system without such isolation.

3.5 PIPE PROTECTION

A. Paint all uninsulated piping underground (except cast iron) with two coats of asphaltic paint (Manual wiping is not acceptable).

B. Wrap soil pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6 mil polylene film or 15 lb. roofing felt.

C. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. roofing felt.

D. Paint all PVC piping exposed to outdoors with UV resistant paint. Paint color to match adjacent building elements.

3.6 TESTS

A. A water test shall be applied to the storm drainage systems either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest openings of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than 10 ft. head of water. In testing successive sections at least the upper 10 ft of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 10 ft of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a 10 ft head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all points.

B. An air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor or testing apparatus to any suitable opening and after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi or sufficient to balance a column of mercury ten inches in height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 30 minutes.

C. Complete all field testing prior to insulation, wrapping and/or backfill.

3.7 VENT FLASHING

A. Extend lead type flashing 12" beyond pipe in all directions and carry to top of pipe with at least 2" return inside of pipe.

B. Install PVC pipe flashing in accordance with flashing manufacturer's recommendation.

C. Flashing for PVC piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



D. Install flashing materials as required by roofing system manufacturer's details and methods.



CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS 22 13 17 - 1

SECTION 22 13 17 - CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Alternates may be or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install cleanouts as shown on drawing or specified herein.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleanouts and cleanout access covers shall be of the type and materials as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Provide all necessary bolts and appurtenances to effect a complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all cleanouts and cleanout access covers in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

B. Exterior cleanouts below grade shall be extended to finish grade. Pour a concrete pad 18" x 18" x 6" thick around cleanout; slope top down approximately 2" from cleanout to edge of pad so that edge of pad is flush with grade.

C. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes to which they are connected up to 4" in diameter; and not less than 4" for larger pipes.


CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS 22 13 17 - 2

D. Cleanouts shall be provided at not more than 50 feet apart in horizontal drainage lines of 4" nominal diameter, and at not more than 75 feet apart for larger diameter pipe.

E. At change in direction: Cleanouts shall be provided at each change of direction of the building drain when the angle of change is 90 degrees.

F. At base of stacks: Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of each vertical stack.

G. Direction of cleanout: All cleanouts shall be installed so that the cleanout opens in a direction opposite to the flow of the drainage line, or at a right angle to the line.

H. Concealed cleanouts in wall shall be provided with removable access panel.

I. Where access cleanout boxes or covers are installed in the floor, the top surface shall be scoriated and the cover secured, but removable when necessary. Polished brass. Install carpet type covers in carpeted areas.



FLOOR DRAINS 22 13 19 - 1

SECTION 22 13 19 - FLOOR DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install floor drains including strainers.




1.4 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAINS

A. Drains shall be of the type and materials as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Provide all necessary bolts, clamping rings and appurtenances to effect a complete installation.

C. The strainer size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. The strainers shall be nickel alloy or polished brass. Provide tapped boss and trap primer floor drains as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DRAINS

A. Install all drains in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.



GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 23 01 00 - 1

SECTION 23 01 00 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE OF DIVISION

A. Work shall include all materials, equipment and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with all applicable codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall include all work specified in Division-22, Plumbing and Division-23, HVAC.

B. Pay for all required licenses, fees, inspections and permits.


A. Work Not in Divisions 22 and 23: Related work not included in this division consists of requirements given in the following as may be included in the contract documents:

1. Other divisions which may include work (such as concrete, steel, painting, ceiling systems, structure and other work) related to the work of Divisions 22 and 23.

B. Work of Divisions 22 and 23: Any or all sections of Divisions 22 and 23 may include a paragraph or paragraphs under the heading, "Relation to other Work". Where such a paragraph is indicated and work directly related to the section is listed or described, such work shall be considered as relating directly to the indicated section. Any related work (directly related or otherwise) which may be omitted by reference from the "Relation to Other Work" paragraph of such section(s), shall be provided as necessary and required whether or not such work is included by reference. Such listing or description of related work within a section is given only as a convenience to the Contractor; omission of other related sections or described work does not in any way exclude the provision of such work.

C. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate with the controls vendor for all control related equipment that is provided by the controls vendor and installed by the mechanical contractor. Refer to specification 23 09 23 for list of controls vendor supplied items to be installed by the mechanical contractor.

1.4 CODES

A. Install all work in accordance with the latest edition of all applicable regulations and governing codes, including the regulations of the utility companies serving the project.

B. Where a conflict in code requirements occurs the more stringent requirement shall govern.



1.5 STANDARDS

A. All equipment and devices shall bear U.L. label, the label of an industry recognized approved testing agency or A.G.A. certification for said item of equipment or device.

B. All electrical devices must be U.L. approved.

1.6 DRAWINGS

A. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed building. Exact locations and arrangement of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the acceptance of the Architect/Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural drawings and not by scaling drawings.

1.7 DISCREPANCIES

A. In case of differences between drawings and specifications, or where drawings and specifications are not clear or definite, the subject shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for clarification and instructions.

1.8 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

A. Work of Division 23 shall include the electrical requirements which are indicated to be integral with mechanical work and which can be summarized to include (but not necessarily be limited to) the following:

1. Motors.2. Motor starters.3. Furnish combination motor starters / disconnect switches for all fans that are not being

provided with variable frequency drives. Combination motor starter / disconnects to be installed by electrical contractor.

4. Control switch, pilot lights, interlocks and similar devices.5. Electrical heating coils and similar elements in mechanical equipment.6. Electrical work specified in Division-23 for the HVAC control system.7. Drip pans to protect electrical work.

B. Motors, Starters, Switches: Provide with all motorized mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Drip Pans: Where possible, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) equipment which is sensitive to moisture; otherwise provide drip pans under mechanical piping. Locate pan below piping, and extend 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment. Fabricate pans 2" deep, of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 20 gage copper, or 16 gage steel with 2 oz. zinc finish hot dipped after fabrication. Provide 3/4" copper drainage piping, properly discharged.



D. Motors: Refer to “Electric Motors, Premium Efficiency Type”.

1.9 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL WORK

A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows: (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "furnish" and "install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph.) Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph shall be coordinated as individually specified.

1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation.2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate

intended location of an item and to set and connect it in place.3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install.4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power

circuit is connected.5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a

controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71.) Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor).

6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).)

7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc.

8. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device.

B. Work of Division-23 includes (but is not necessarily limited to):

1. Provide:

a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division-23 equipment (such as starters packaged with chillers, etc.).

b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 23.

c. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from the Division-26 panels to point of use including the necessary circuit breakers.

d. All other control circuits, including conduit and boxes.e. All control connections to equipment.f. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems

electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.).

g. Auxiliary control devices.h. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.)

and make control circuit connections thereto.i. Any and all pneumatic and electronic and electric control devices and electric or

pneumatic connections thereto.



2. Furnish:

a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment (such as centrifugal chiller starters which are matched with the chillers but are not physically an integral part of the chiller assembly.)

C. Work of Division-26 includes (but is not necessarily limited to):

1. Provide:

a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes.b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems

electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.).

c. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division-23 to be provided as part of the equipment itself.

d. All controllers (except those which are generally manufactured or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment such as centrifugal chiller starters).

2. Install:

a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment (e.g., chiller starters).

1.10 AUXILIARIES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems.

1.11 INVESTIGATION OF SITE

A. Check site and existing conditions thoroughly before bidding. Advise Architect/Engineer of discrepancies or questions noted before bidding.

1.12 ASBESTOS

A. Should asbestos, or any other hazardous waste material, be encountered during the execution of the work, or should the presence of asbestos or any other hazardous material be suspected, immediately notify the Owner and suspend all work in the affected area. The Owner will activate an assessment study to determine the presence of asbestos, or other hazardous material, and evaluate what condition it is in. Removal of asbestos, or other hazardous material, if required, will be conducted by a qualified Contractor, and will be done under separate contract.

1.13 COORDINATION

A. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work of this division connects to or is affected by work of others.



1.14 PROVISIONS FOR OPENINGS

A. Provide all openings required for work performed under Division-23. Provide sleeves or other approved methods to allow passage of items installed under any Section of Division-23.

1.15 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES

A. Any interruption of existing services shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner's Representative. Shutdown time and duration of critical services shall be decided by the Owner. Contractor shall provide shutoff valves at point of tie-in to minimize downtime.


A. Ductwork: Keep the interior of the duct system free from dirt and rubbish and other foreign matter. All fan motors, switches, and other items, shall also be protected from dirt, rubbish and other foreign matter during building construction. Thoroughly clean all components of the ductwork and remove all dirt, scale, oil and other foreign substances which may have accumulated during the installation process.

B. Equipment: All mechanical equipment provided shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, concrete, etc. Any dents, scratches or other visible blemishes shall be corrected and the appearance of the equipment made "like new" and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment shall be removed from the site.

D. Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Protect all materials and equipment from damage, entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment which are damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched up. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition.

1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings for all items, services and systems included in the project.

B. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following:

1. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specification and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item.



2. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Architect/Engineer accept any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect/Engineer's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered.

C. Additional Requirements: See specific sections of the Specifications for any additional requirements.

1.18 SHOP DRAWINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals are to be submitted electronically in the form of PDF. Electronic submittal file names must be formatted with the specification section number followed by the title of the specification section. One file shall be provided for each specification section that requires submittals to be provided.

B. A cover page shall have adequate space for Contractor, Subcontractor and Engineer review stamps and indicate the following minimum data:

1. Project Name2. Project Address3. Contractor Name4. Subcontractor Name5. Specification Section Number6. Specification Section Name7. Submittal Date

C. All shop drawings and equipment submittals shall be submitted complete based on specification division. Partial submittals of each specification section will not be accepted.

D. All submittals shall have been reviewed for compliance Contractor and associated subcontractor prior to submission to the Engineer. A stamp bearing the name of the reviewer and date review was completed shall be on the cover page of the submittal.

E. Submittal data shall be logically grouped based on equipment tags or like material. For

submittals that contain data on multiple materials or equipment, it shall be clearly noted by equipment tag or applicable material.

F. Manufacturer’s data indicating multiple options or choices shall be clearly noted as to what is applicable to the material and equipment being provided. Information not applicable should be struck through or extracted.

1.19 SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS AND DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Shop drawings for piping systems and duct systems shall be performed by the installing subcontractors. Shop drawings shall show all required maintenance and operational clearances required. Title drawings shall include identification of project and names of Architect, Engineer, Contractor, subcontractor and/or supplier, date, be numbered sequentially and shall indicate the following:

1. Architectural and structural backgrounds with room names and numbers, etc., including but not limited to plans, sections, elevations, details, etc.

a. Fabrication and Erection dimensions.



b. Arrangements and sectional views.c. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with other

work.d. Kinds of materials and finishes.e. Descriptive names of equipment.f. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract.

B. Also provide shop drawings, using architectural reflected ceiling plans, which indicate locations of the following (to be verified by Contractor): Air distribution devices, sprinkler heads, lights, access panels, fire alarm, speakers, projectors or any system device intended to be installed in the ceiling.

C. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements.

1.20 AIR HANDLING UNIT AND DUCTWORK CONFIGURATION SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for all system and shall meet the following requirements:

1. Be drawn at not less than a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0". Contractor may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = 1'-0", 1/2" = 1'-0" may be used.).

2. Clearly show all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings.

3. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, housekeeping pads, piping, equipment, electrical work or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes.

4. Where Drawings show units in plan only, shop drawings shall show proposed units in plan and also in elevation.

5. Shop drawings shall also show exact locations of related work (such as bar joists, columns, beams, sound attenuators, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration.

6. Each section of each air handling unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.).

B. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air handling unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air handling units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered.

1.21 ELECTRONIC FILES

A. CADD files will be available on a limited basis to qualified firms at the Architects prerogative. Recipients are cautioned that these files may not accurately show actual conditions as constructed. Users are responsible to verify actual field conditions. These files are not intended to be used as shop drawings.

1.22 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Submit for checking a specific set of written operating instructions on each item which requires instructions to operate. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Brochure. Refer also to other sections which may describe operating instructions.



1.23 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A. Submit for acceptance Maintenance Information consisting of manufacturer's printed instruction and parts lists for each major item of equipment. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Brochure. Refer also to other sections which may describe maintenance.

1.24 MANUFACTURER'S CHECK-OUT

A. Check out by Manufacturer's Representative (for major items of equipment): At completion of construction and after performance verification information as above-mentioned has been gathered, submitted and accepted, provide one copy of this information to the manufacturer's representative. Work required under this section shall include having the representative examine the performance verification information, check the equipment in the field while it is operating, and sign a Check-Out Memo for record. Submit a copy of the memo on each major item of equipment for each brochure. Accepted memos shall be inserted on each brochure with the performance verification information and submittal data. Memos shall be submitted and accepted before Instruction in Operation to Owner or a request for final inspection.

1.25 SYSTEM GUARANTEE

A. The work required under Division-23 shall include a one year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner to replace for the Owner any defective workmanship, equipment, or material which has been furnished under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the System. This guarantee shall also include reasonable adjustments of the system required for proper operation during the guarantee period. Explain the provisions of guarantee to Owner at the "Instruction in Operation Conference".

1.26 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER

A. Submit all required items for checking one week before final inspection of the building is scheduled. When all items are accepted and placed in the proper brochures, the Contractor shall give notice in writing that he is ready to give the Owner an "Instruction in Operation Conference". After the above mentioned request is received the Contractor will be notified of the time the conference can be held with the Owner. At the conference, the Contractor shall review with the Owner all appropriate information. At the end of the conference, seven copies of a memo certifying Instruction in Operation and Completed Demonstration shall be signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor and Owner and one copy inserted in each brochure.

1.27 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in this division of the specifications.

1. Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, substituted equipment model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for the Architect/Engineer to determine that the equipment meets all specification and requirements. If the Architect/Engineer accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth in writing.



2. Substituted equipment with all accessories installed or optional equipment where permitted and accepted, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems of this or other trades as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and Contractor shall so state in his written request for substitution.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Materials and Equipment specified in these contract documents are accepted only in regards to general performance and quality. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that acceptable materials and equipment meet or exceed the efficiencies, capacities, electrical characteristics, performance and quality of the equipment herein specified. Acceptable equipment must also generally conform, without extensive modification of related systems to the accessories, weights, space and maintenance requirements, etc., of the specified equipment. Any modification to related systems of this or other trades shall be made at the Contractor's expense and the Contractor shall be responsible for coordination between trades. Any difference in capacity, efficiency, electrical characteristics, weights or quality of product, etc., between specified materials and equipment and acceptable alternates shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance within 30 days of Notice to Proceed.

C. If no prior approval for substitutions or alternate manufacturers have been provided, the bid must conform with the requirements of the plans and specifications. No equipment substitutions or alternate manufacturers will be considered once the project bidding has ended.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Section part not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Section part not applicable.



BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section, in addition to the following:

1.2 SCOPE

A. Materials listed herein are general mechanical materials to be used under the Division 23 sections of the specifications unless specifically noted otherwise in the particular section or on the drawings.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. This section relates to all sections of Division 23 as may be applicable to the work of each section.

1.4 STANDARDS

A. Quality and weight of materials shall comply with requirements and specifications of the appropriate standards of the American Society of Testing and Materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL

A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect.

B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and certified by Underwriters Laboratory or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.

C. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a standard item or system shall be furnished with all options, features and capabilities to meet the project requirements.

D. Performance and Capacity:

1. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance. In some cases equipment may be sized to allow for future requirements or for other reasons which may not be stated on the Drawings or in the



Specifications; provide equipment and systems with the capacities, capabilities and features indicated to provide the maximum or minimum (as appropriate) conditions.

E. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows:

1. No overloading.2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the

manufacturer and accepted by the Architect/Engineer.3. Compatible with all systems.

F. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows:

1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application.2. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application

except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Locations: Provide access doors and panels (access units) as necessary for access to items which are concealed and which may require service or maintenance or other reason for accessibility. Examples of such items include, but are not limited to, the following: valves, cleanouts, pipe unions, expansion joints and connectors, dampers, coils, junction boxes, duct heaters, terminal units, HVAC control system devices and similar types of items.

B. Access units: Shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson, Boico, Nystrom or Ventfabrics. Types are as follows (Milcor style designations are used for example only):

Location Door/Panel TypeDrywall Style "DW"Masonry or tile Style "M-stainless"Acoustical tile Style "AT"Plaster Style "K"Fire-rated walls Style "Fire Rated"**(**or as indicated below)

C. Fire Rated Units:

1. Frame and panel assembly shall bear a U.L. label reading, "frame and door assembly, rating 1-1/2-hour (B), temperature rise 30 minutes 250oF maximum".

2. Have an automatic closing device and mechanism to release the latch bolt from the inside.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Boico Style F, Inryco/Milcor Style VA, Nystrom Style APFR.

D. Non-fire Rated Units:

1. Steel panels and frames.2. Locks and latches shall be as appropriate for the location and shall be cam-lock type

latches, flush screw driver operated locks or cylindrical locks.3. Provide two keys for all doors. All doors shall be keyed the same.



E. Other Requirements:

1. Doors and panels installed in glazed or ceramic tiled surfaces, in toilet rooms or in kitchens shall be stainless steel.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, finish shall be rust inhibitive prime coat.

F. Sizes:

1. Minimum size: 8" x 8".2. Sizes of each unit shall be individually selected to allow the recommended and required

service and maintenance and accessibility functions to be accomplished. These functions shall generally include, for example, valve removal, damper linkage resetting, control adjustment, lubrication, repair, replacement and similar tasks as may be necessary and recommended for the concealed item.

3. Sizes shall be of the following increments (unless otherwise approved) to allow the accessibility function to be accomplished: 8" x 8", 8" x 12", 12" x 12", 12" x 16", 16" x 16", 16" x 24", 24" x 24", 24" x 36", 30" x 30", 36" x 36" or 36" x 48".

4. No size smaller than 16" x 24" shall be allowed when a person must pass through the access opening in order to accomplish the desired accessibility function.

5. Every attic or furred space in which mechanical equipment is installed shall be accessible by an opening and passageway as large as the largest piece of the equipment and in no case less than 22 x 36 inches continuous from the opening to the equipment and its controls. The opening to the passageway shall be located not more than 20 feet from the equipment measured along the center line of such passageway.

2.3 PAINTING AND MARKING

A. All paint and materials used for painting shall be manufacturer's "first quality" product. For additional paint material requirements, refer to Section 09 91 01, Painting.

B. Marking: Refer also to sections describing identification of mechanical systems.

2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Refer to other sections of Division 23 for any requirements which may be additional to this section. Comply with the more stringent requirement if more than one method is specified or shown.

B. Pipe supporting devices specified herein shall apply to all Division 23 piping unless modified in subsequent sections of Division 23 (i.e., vibration isolation) or detailed on the drawings.

1. Pipe hangers for copper pipe shall be copper or copperplated and for steel pipe shall be zinc-plated, clevis type hangers.

2. Hangers for pressure piping shall be clevis type or accepted as equivalent. Pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment after erection of the piping. Piping shall not be hung from fire and/or smoke walls.

3. Vertical piping supports shall be constructed of carbon steel with rounded ears and two or four holes for clamping bolts. Steel, galvanized and cast iron piping riser clamps shall have galvanized finish. Copper and brass piping riser clamps shall have electro-plated copper or PVC coating finish.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers are Grinnell, PHD Manufacturing Inc., Fee and Mason, Michigan and Elcen.



C. Beam clamps may be used when supporting piping from steel structures.

D. Concrete inserts shall be placed in forms as work of Division 23 prior to the time that concrete is poured.

E. Lead tamp-ins may be used when installed in a concrete or masonry wall or other like vertical surface to support a vertical hanger. Lead tamp-ins will not be permitted to support hangers to the underside of a concrete slab.

F. For parallel runs of above ground suspended piping, an acceptable trapeze-type hanger may be used. Provide permanent, non-conductive type wrapping between copper pipe and steel trapeze hangers.

G. Powder set type fasteners or inserts shall not be used.

2.5 FLOOR, WALL OR CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS IN EXPOSED AREAS

A. Shall be chrome-plated. Escutcheons for extended sleeves shall be of the type designed for that purpose. Split ring escutcheons will not be allowed.

B. Escutcheons to be as manufactured by Guarantee Specialty Mfg. Co., Cleveland, Ohio; American Sanitary Mfg. Co., Abingdon, Ill., or Beaton Cadwell.

C. Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 3A chromium plated brass; for sleeves extending above floor shall be equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 36 chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gage galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equivalent to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL approval.

B. Pipe Sleeves: Except where specified otherwise below, pipe sleeves shall be as follows:

1. Sleeves installed in walls subject to hydrostatic (water) pressures shall be "link seal" (Thunderline Corp) Type WS or accepted as equivalent.

2. When there is piping existing, and fire rated walls are to be erected, Proset fire rated split wall system pipe sleeves, or accepted equivalent, are to be used.

3. When copper or steel slab penetrations are required, use Proset System A, or accepted as equivalent for fire-rated and water pipe installations.

C. Walls and Partitions:

1. Sleeves 8-Inch Diameter and Smaller (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be mild steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving



a clear space of 1/4-inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have mild steel sleeves.

2. Sleeves Installed in Exterior Walls (Below Grade): Schedule 40 steel hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or cast iron sleeve with 1/4-inch x 3-inch center flange (water stop) around the outside.

D. Floors (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 10 galvanized steel, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4-inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend ½-inch above finished floor.

E. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions.

F. Sealing of Sleeves:

1. Sleeves Below Grade: Caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve using oakum and poured lead both sides minimum one inch deep to make wall penetration water tight.

2. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin-proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass.

3. Sealing of Sleeves Through Fire Rated Barriers: All penetrations through fire rated barriers shall comply with Division-07 or as specified in this Division.

2.7 FIRE/SMOKE RATED FLOOR, PARTITION OR WALL PENETRATION SEALANT

A. Seal shall be composed of fire barrier product, putty, or caulking materials used either in combination or singularly. Acceptable Manufacturers are 3M Corporation or Dow Corning.

2.8 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Provide as necessary to accomplish work specified. Perform in accordance with applicable State and Local codes and accepted good practice and in accordance with other applicable sections or divisions.

2.9 BELT DRIVES

A. General: Equip each motor driven machine not direct connected with V-belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor.

B. Speed Adjustment: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drives until proper speed adjustment is made and then fitted with proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan needed to deliver necessary air quantity.

C. Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5-hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed):



Fan Speed(RPM) Maximum Vibration Level

800 or Less 5 Mils (0.127 mm) max. displacement801 and Greater 0.20 in/sec. (5 mm/s) max. velocity

D. Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. standard gage 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. standard gage. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to adjust belt tension. Means shall also be provided to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA.

2.10 BEARINGS

A. All bearings shall be 200,000-hour rated unless otherwise specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT ACCESS

A. Access Doors and Panels:

1. Locations: Provide access unit at the following locations.

a. Where additionally specified in other sections of this Division 23 and where specifically indicated on the drawings.

b. Where not specifically indicated on the drawings but where the work to be provided will require accessibility for purposes as described or as recommended by the manufacturer of the concealed item.

c. At all locations where concealed equipment, fixtures, devices and similar items require accessibility for service, inspection, maintenance, repair, replacement and where such concealed item would not otherwise be accessible for such functions without the provision of an appropriately sized access unit.

B. Installation:

1. Definitions: For the purpose of coordination of responsibility, the following words are defined to describe the intended coordination.

a. "Furnish" means to procure an item and deliver it to the project for installation.b. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the intended

appropriate location of an item and to set, connect and otherwise fix in place in a manner to allow intended operation and use.

c. "Provide" means to both furnish and install fully and completely in all aspects.

2. Furnishing Access Units: Access units shall be furnished as work of the Division which governs the item which is intended to be made accessible by the access unit.



3. Installing Access Units: Access units shall be installed as work of the Division which governs the surface, barrier, partition or other building component in and on which the access unit is to be placed.

4. Determination of Locations:

a. Where the work of Division 23 requires that the access unit be provided (i.e., both furnished and installed), then the responsibility for determination of the location at which the access unit is to be placed is also work of Division 23.

b. Where the work of Division 23 requires that access unit be furnished for installation as work of another Division, then the responsibility for determination of the location at which the access unit is to be installed shall be work of Division 23. Conversely, where the work of one Division requires that an access unit be only installed, then the responsibility for determination of the location of which the access unit is to be installed shall be work of Division 23 which furnishes the access unit.

5. Determination of Sizes:

a. Unless an access unit size is indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified, the size of each access unit shall be determined as work of the Division which either provides or furnishes the access unit.

b. Sizes for access units which are provided or furnished as work of this Division shall be in compliance with sizing criteria of this Division.

3.2 PAINTING

A. Paint all exposed piping, insulation, equipment, structural bases, racks, in equipment rooms and on roof, furnished under Division 23 of these specifications. All exposed metal surfaces shall be given one prime coat and two finish coats. All insulated surfaces shall be given one sizing coat of glue sizing (omit this step if factory applied finish is suitable to receive prime coat), one prime coat and one finish coat. Factory painted or finished items do not require field painting but shall require "touch-up" with matching paint or finish where scratched.

B. Pipe hangers, saddles, supports, riser clamps and accessories shall be painted to match their piping.

C. Equipment not completely accessible for painting when set in place shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted before installation and suitably protected.

D. Piping concealed need not be painted.

3.3 HANGERS AND INSERTS

A. Refer also to other sections which may describe additional requirements for hanging and supporting. Comply with the more stringent requirement if more than one method is specified or shown.

B. Provide and properly locate hangers to adequately support piping and equipment. Arrange hangers to permit expansion and contraction.

C. The size of hanger for non-insulated pipes shall be suitable for pipe size to be supported. For insulated piping, the size of the hanger shall be suitable for the pipe size, plus the insulation and a 16-gauge half-circle galvanized sheet metal insulation saddle.



D. Isolation of copper pipe from steel hangers to consist of wrapping pipe at, and 1" each side of contact surface with not less than two layers of adhesive type plastic electrical insulating tape.

E. Pipe supports for piping 2" diameter and below may be supported directly from Epicure steel decking using Epicure standard hangers (200 lb. max. load). Piping above 2" shall be supported from steel beams.

F. Locate pipe supports as follows unless noted in other sections of these specifications or on the drawings:

1. Horizontal cast iron pipe inside building - supported on each length of pipe.2. Vertical cast iron pipe inside building - supported at each floor level and at the base.3. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing 1" diameter and under - support on 6' centers.4. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing above 1" through 1-1/2" diameter - support on

8' centers.5. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing larger than 1-1/2" diameter -support on 10'

centers, except 24" diameter piping shall be supported by main roof beams (20' O.C. maximum).

6. Support vertical cast iron, steel and copper piping at each floor penetration not to exceed 20 foot intervals.

3.4 ANCHORS

A. Install a suitable anchor on piping to prevent movement from expansion and contraction by welding or clamping securely to pipe at fitting or coupling. Approval of the Engineer of method of anchorage must be obtained before installation of work. Properly anchor piping to remove strains on equipment which would be caused by expansion and contraction. Adequately insulate anchors on piping, with operating fluid temperatures below 75oF, to prevent moisture condensation problems.

3.5 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION PROVISIONS

A. Piping is designed with offsets and loops to provide for expansion and contraction. At such points, piping shall be cold sprung to equalize expansion when at operating temperatures. Install piping to maintain grade at all operating temperatures.

3.6 FLASHING

A. Flashing shall be done as work of other divisions.

3.7 PIPING SLEEVES

A. Contractor shall furnish and set sleeves for his piping. Use galvanized sheet steel with water tight seams and joints or pipe for poured concrete. Extend sleeves thru walls, partitions and ceilings to finished surface. Extend sleeves 1/4 inch above finished concrete floors and 1 inch above slab in chases. Sleeves, installed above finished ceilings, for fire/smoke rated wall assemblies shall extend 1" beyond each face of wall.

B. Adequately size sleeves to permit clearance for pipe movement and proper grading of pipes. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of adequate size to clear insulation.



C. Caulk space between insulation or pipe and sleeve with asbestos rope and seal with fire rated safing material (or flexible fire retardant sealant if pipe is subject to expansion or contraction) to serve as a fire and smoke stop.

D. Sleeves in walls and/or slabs subject to hydrostatic pressures shall be made water tight.

3.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons (for 1/4 or 1 inch projecting sleeves as required) at each point where an uninsulated pipe passes thru a finished surface.

3.9 CONCRETE BASES AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Concrete bases and structural steel to support equipment and piping installed under each specification section or division and not specifically shown on the structural or architectural plans shall be furnished for this work.

3.10 SEALANT

A. Fire/smoke sealant shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.



ELECTRIC MOTORS, PREMIUM EFFICIENCY TYPE 23 05 13 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13 - ELECTRIC MOTORS, PREMIUM EFFICIENCY TYPE

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 26 – Electrical.

1.2 SCOPE

A. This Section describes electric motors which are higher efficiency. These motors require less energy than standard electric motors which do not meet this specification.

B. This specification covers 3/4 HP or larger horizontal, 3 phase, integral horsepower, drip proof, squirrel cage induction motors in the NEMA frame sizes through 449.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.4 STANDARDS

A. All motors shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA Standard MG-1. Motors shall also comply with the applicable portions of the National Electric Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Independent motor submittals for motors that are part of air handling unit or pumping equipment shall be provided for all motors 1 HP or greater.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY

A. Motors through 100 hp shall be rated 230/460 volts with 200 or 575 volts as optional; motors above 100 hp shall be rated 460 volts with 575 volts as optional. Motors will be rated for operation on a 3 phase, 60 Hertz power supply. Refer to Electrical Drawings.

2.2 COORDINATION

A. Where variable frequency drives are used to vary the speed and power consumption of electric motors, such motors must be high efficiency type and must be considered with the



actual variable frequency drives which are provided so that optimum matching of variable frequency drive to driven motor is obtained.

2.3 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

A. Torques: Motors shall meet or exceed the locked rotor (starting) and minimum breakdown torques specified in NEMA standards for Design B for the ratings specified.

B. Currents: Locked rotor (starting) currents shall not exceed NEMA Design B maximum values for the specified rating. Motors shall be capable of a 20 second stall at six times full load current without injurious heating to the motor components.

C. Efficiency: Motors shall have full load efficiency which will meet or exceed the values for NEMA Premium® efficiency motors as listed in NEMA 1-2006, Table 12-12 when tested in accordance with NEMA test standard MG1-12.53a, IEEE Test Procedure 112, Method B, using accuracy improvement by segregated loss determination including stray load loss measurements. The minimum efficiency shall be guaranteed.

2.4 SERVICE FACTOR AND AMBIENT

A. Motors shall be rated for a 1.15 service factor in a 40oC ambient.

2.5 INSULATION

A. For constant speed application motors, provide full Class B insulation system.

B. For motors with variable frequency drive, provide with Class F insulation suitable for operation down to 10%.

2.6 FRAME SIZE

A. Horsepower/frame relationship shall conform to the latest NEMA Standard for T frame motors.

2.7 ENCLOSURE

A. Motors shall be drip proof construction.

B. Motor frame and endshields shall be of cast aluminum construction using alloys with low copper content.

2.8 BEARINGS

A. All motors shall have anti-friction bearings, sized for a L-10 life of at least 125,000 hours L-10 life for a direct connected load.

B. Aluminum endshields shall have a cast-in steel or cast iron bearing insert.

C. Bearing housing shall be regreasable with provisions for purging old grease.



D. Bearings shall be preloaded with a bearing loading spring to minimize noise and increase bearing life.

2.9 OTHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Box shall be diagonally split and rotatable in 90 degree increments.

B. External hardware shall be plated to resist corrosion.

C. External paint shall withstand industrial environments.

D. Nameplates shall be of stainless steel or aluminum and stamped per NEMA Standard MG1-10.37. Nameplate information shall include the nominal efficiency value per Standard MG1-12.53b and the manufacturer's minimum guaranteed efficiency value.

2.10 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. In addition to shop drawing requirements of the section entitled, "General Mechanical Provisions", provide motor data including horsepower; rpm; frame size; nominal efficiency and nominal power factor at full load, 75% load and 50% load; guaranteed efficiency and guaranteed power factor at full load, 75% load and 50% load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOTOR LOCATIONS

A. Provide NEMA Premium® efficiency motors for the following as provided on this project:

1. Motors for pumps.2. Motors for AHU fans.3. Motors for cooling tower fans.



INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 05 15 - 1

SECTION 23 05 15 - INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems.



B. This section directly relates in particular to sections which describe the following:

1. Valves and piping systems components requiring maintenance and which are involved in the dynamic function of the systems.

2. Pumps and related flow devices.3. Plumbing equipment (heat exchangers, packaged systems, etc.)4. HVAC equipment (all air handling equipment, terminal units, filter assemblies, etc).5. Control systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide Maintenance Manuals in PDF format as follows:

1. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's, subcontractor's control subcontractor and related contractor's or material supplier's names, addresses and phone numbers.

2. Index of contents.3. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized

representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt.

4. Operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems:

a. How to start and stop each piece of equipment.b. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation.c. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor.d. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment

including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems.


INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 05 15 - 2

e. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks.

5. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, including (but not limited to) the following:

a. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item.b. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position.c. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up.

6. Any as-built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems.

7. Copies of certificates of inspection.8. Guarantees.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VERBAL INSTRUCTION

A. Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel.

1. Duration: Total instruction period for all systems of this Division 23 shall be not less than fifteen (15) working days. The Owner reserves the right to audio-tape or video-tape the instruction procedure.

3.2 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES

A. Verbal instruction at the site for the following equipment items and systems shall be given jointly by the contractor and the authorized manufacturer's service representative. (Contractor and manufacturer's service representative shall provide instruction to Owner for each equipment item of no less duration than the hours indicated in parenthesis. Duration shall be greater if otherwise specified).

1. Air Handling Units. (48 hours)2. Terminal Units. (8 hours)



HOUSEKEEPING PADS, CONCRETE 23 05 16 - 1

SECTION 23 05 16 - HOUSEKEEPING PADS, CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for the equipment listed in this section. This work shall be performed by the concrete installer.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Divisions 22 and 23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.

B. This section directly related in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following:

1. Concrete described in other divisions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All concrete and steel for concrete housekeeping pads shall comply with those sections of the specification division describing concrete and steel.

2.2 HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Provide reinforced (#4's @ 12" both ways with 1-1/2" top cover) concrete housekeeping pads for each individual machine. Pads shall extend six inches beyond the machine bases in all directions and be continuous beneath the machine. Pads shall have chamfered edges and shall be poured and finished smooth and level to insure proper and continuous support for the bearing surfaces of the machine.

B. Coordinate exact length and width of each pad and any penetrations which may be necessary for piping or conduit with the actual equipment approved for use on the project.


HOUSEKEEPING PADS, CONCRETE 23 05 16 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to the section describing vibration isolation for equipment which is to rest on concrete housekeeping pads.

3.2 PAD HEIGHTS

A. Provide 6" high concrete pads for the following:

1. All equipment specified or shown to be on a concrete pad if no height is given.2. Indoor air handling units.3. Control air compressor assembly.4. Compression tank assembly (if floor mounted).5. Floor mounted pumps.6. Heating hot water boilers.7. Domestic water heaters.



PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN 23 05 18 - 1

SECTION 23 05 18 - PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide condensate drain piping from cooling coil drain pans.



B. This section directly relates in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following:

1. Air handling equipment with cooling coils.2. Insulation.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE

A. Type M hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM Spec. B88.

2.2 FITTINGS

A. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22.

2.3 SOLDER

A. Composition SB5 (95/5), Fed. Spec. QQ-S-571d and Class 3 (Sil Fos), Fed. Spec. AA-S-561d, ASTM B32.


PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN 23 05 18 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Piping shall be sloped uniformly toward drain, and provided with trap seal having a depth, in inches, equivalent to one and one-half (1-1/2) times the total static pressure of the respective fan system. Traps shall be assembled using elbows and tees with threaded brass plugs to permit cleaning of trap and drain line. Piping shall be installed in a neat manner and shall be not smaller than full size of the equipment drain connection or three-quarters inch (3/4") whichever is larger.

3.2 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight.

B. Solder Joints: Cut pipe square using cutting tool which does not crimp pipe. Remove all burrs using pipe reamer and taking care not to flare the pipe end. Thoroughly clean the outside of pipe and the interior of the fittings using a fine sand cloth. Apply noncorrosive paste flux to the cleaned surfaces immediately and apply solder and heat, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to complete joint.

C. Equipment Connections: Connections to copper drain nipples may be made with solder joints provided care is exercised not to damage equipment, its insulation or finish. Connections to equipment having steel nipples shall be made using screwed to solder adapters with teflon tape applied to male threads prior to assembly.

3.3 ROUTING

A. Unless otherwise indicated, route pipe discharge as follows:

1. Roof Mounted Equipment: To nearest roof drain.2. Interior Equipment: To nearest floor drain.

3.4 INSULATION

A. Insulate if so specified in section describing insulation.



GAUGES 23 05 19 - 1

SECTION 23 05 19 - GAUGES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide pressure gauges, gauge valves, test plugs, snubbers and similar devices for indication of operating conditions of such points as are indicated on drawings and as specified herein.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.


1. Thermometers.2. HVAC piping systems.3. All HVAC equipment through which fluid flows and at which fluid pressures may need to

be determined.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitles "General Mechanical Provisions". Provide schedule of ranges and proposed locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAUGES

A. Four and one-half inch (4-1/2") diameter with cast aluminum black finish flangeless case and chrome ring. Bourdon tube: phosphor bronze, silver soldered to socket and tip. Socket: forged brass bottom outlet type. Movement: stainless steel rotary type with delrin sector and bushings and micrometer type pointer. Acceptable: H.O. Trerice Co. 500X or an equivalent.

B. Where Permanent Gauge is Installed: Brass, needle valve, round knurled handle, 1/4" male x 1/4" female NPT. Acceptable: H. O. Trerice Co. 735 Type FFG, or equivalent.

C. Where Permanent Gauge is Not Installed: Brass gate valve 1/4" female NPT. Acceptable: Crane No. 438 or NIBCO No. T-113, or equivalent.


GAUGES 23 05 19 - 2

2.2 PRESSURE SNUBBER

A. Brass, 1/4" male x 1/4" female NPT. Acceptable: H. O. Trerice Co. 872-2, or equivalent.

2.3 COILED SYPHON PIGTAILS

A. Single turn 360 degree coil, arranged with plane of coil parallel to its flow, constructed of 1/4" tubing with male NPT threads on both end extensions. Acceptable: H. O. Trerice Co. 885-series.

2.4 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE TEST PLUGS

A. Use at Contractor's option as specified in Part 3 of this section. Body of brass or 316 stainless steel. Valve core of neoprene for applications to 200oF and of Nordel for applications to 275oF. Rated for pressure to 1000 psig. Screwed hexagonal cap and gasket. Size 1/4" NPT or 1/2" NPT as applicable. Length 1-1/2" or 3" as applicable to penetrate and allow for insulation. Designed for taking temperature and pressure readings when used with recommended probes. Acceptable: Pete's Plug, Standard or XL Size as manufactured by Peterson Equipment Company, Inc., Richardson TX 75081; Sisco P/T Plugs; or equivalent.

1. Test Kit: Provide Owner with one companion test kit suitable for taking temperature and pressure readings with test plugs. Provide to Architect/Engineer written certification of delivery of test kit to Owner; certification shall be signed by Owner's authorized representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install pressure gauges, gauge valves, test plugs and snubbers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and locate in such a manner as to permit easy reading of all gauges associated with a single piece of equipment from a single point on the floor (or working platform).

3.2 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Install in such a manner as to give an accurate reading of the actual conditions and to permit easy access to gauge and gauge valve. Where mounting location does not permit rotation of the gauge for removal, install using the union type (880) gauge valve. Range shall be selected to read near center at normal operating conditions.

3.3 GAUGE VALVE

A. Install using brass nipples of sufficient length to raise gauge valve clear of insulation and finish.


GAUGES 23 05 19 - 3

3.4 SNUBBER

A. Provide on all gauges at suction and discharge of all pumps and elsewhere as required to prevent pulsation.

3.5 COILED SYPHON PIGTAIL

A. Provide on pressure gauges used to steam service. Install pigtails and gauges vertically.

3.6 LOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS

A. Provide as described in this section unless individual locations are otherwise shown on drawings.

3.7 PERMANENT PRESSURE GAUGE LOCATIONS

A. Provide permanent gauges, with gauge valves, at the following locations:

1. Fluid inlet and outlet of:

a. Each water coil in each air handling unit.b. Hydronic system strainers in main piping system (not required at strainers which may

be located at individual air handling units or similar equipment unless otherwise indicated).

c. Each air separator.d. Each water inlet and outlet at each chiller.

2. Suction and discharge of each pump.3. Where otherwise indicated.

3.8 GAUGE VALVE ONLY LOCATIONS

A. Provide gauge valves to permit temporary or permanent installation of gauges for pressure indication at the following locations:

1. Inlets and outlets of water coils at:

a. Each fan coil unit.b. Each terminal unit hot water coil.c. Where otherwise indicated.


A. Where a gauge valve and a thermometer well is indicated as a pair (i.e., side by side), Contractor may at his option, provide only a single test plug. Provide only at the following location (at Contractor's operation in lieu of the gauge valves specified above and in lieu of thermometer wells specified in "Thermometers" section):

1. Inlets and outlets of each coil at each terminal unit.2. Inlet and outlet of each coil in each fan coil unit.


GAUGES 23 05 19 - 4

3.10 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Protect equipment from damage from time of its receipt until final acceptance and shall thoroughly clean the pressure gauges, gauge valves and like items of all dirt and construction debris prior to requesting final inspection. Gauges which become damaged during the course of construction shall be repaired to "as new" condition or shall be replaced with new equipment.



PIPING SYSTEMS: FLUSHING AND CLEANING 23 05 20 - 1

SECTION 23 05 20 - PIPING SYSTEMS: FLUSHING AND CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Completely flush and clean the new piping systems for chilled water prior to making final connections to the existing central system. Provide all plant, materials, equipment and labor required to flush and clean the new piping systems prior to operation.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Include specific data on: all chemicals, feeders, blow down valves and like items; as well as complete piping diagrams. Include complete description of methods.

1.5 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATINGS

A. Unless otherwise specified in this section, components specified by this section shall be recommended and rated for same (or greater) maximum working pressure and temperature conditions which are applicable to the fluid system at the location(s) at which the equipment and systems of this section are installed. Refer to specification section(s) describing the related fluid systems(s) for pressure and temperature ratings applicable to the components of this section.

1.6 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. The water treatment chemical supplier shall be a recognized specialist, active in the field of industrial water treatment for at least ten years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOT FEEDER

A. Provide a temporary shot feeder installed across the pumping system suction and discharge sides to allow injection of cleaning chemicals into the system.



B. Shot feeders shall be Mogul, Mitco, Garrett Callahan, Culligan, Nalco or equivalent.

2.2 WATER TREATMENT CHEMICALS

A. Formulation shall not contain any ingredients which are harmful to system materials.

B. Chemicals shall be supplied same manufacturer that is currently supplying chemicals to the owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install chemical feeding systems as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, to comply with requirements and intended purposes.

3.2 SHOT FEEDER

A. Install shot feeder with adequate pressure differential to permit flow through the chemical feeder body. Connect feed piping to inlet and outlet connections with shutoff valves. Pipe drain valve discharge to drain.

B. Provide all hardware and chemicals for start-up of system and full operation of initial system fill.

C. Connect water treatment piping system to mechanical systems and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union or flanges on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection.

3.3 CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. All piping lines and related equipment shall be thoroughly flushed out with precleaning chemicals designed to remove deposition such as pipe dope, oils, loose rust and mill scale and other extraneous materials. Add recommended dosages of precleaner chemical products and circulate throughout the water system. Feed chemicals at the proper feed rates, check that the cleaning solution is actually in each system, flush the system and shall check each system following flushing to insure all cleaning chemicals have been removed from each system. Open all modulating valves, zone valves and all other system restrictions. Drain, fill and flush system until no foreign matter is observed.

B. Chemical used for cleaning of systems shall comply with the recommendations of the manufacturers of the major components in the system.

C. A certificate of cleaning shall be provided by the cleaning chemical supplier to the Owner.

3.4 PIPING

A. Installation of piping shall be made in a manner which provides for all drains and temporary connections necessary to clean and flush the new piping systems.




A. Provide all necessary pipe, valves, fittings, unions and other items necessary for proper installation and removal of all components needed to clean and flush the system.

B. Locate temporary shot type feeder in valved bypass from pump discharge to pump suction. Provide gate valve in bypass on each side of feeder.



THERMOMETERS 23 05 21 - 1

SECTION 23 05 21 - THERMOMETERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide thermometers and wells for temperature indication at such points as indicated on drawings and as specified herein.




1. Gauges.2. HVAC piping systems.3. All HVAC equipment which contains heat transfer components where fluid temperatures

may need to be determined.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Provide schedule of ranges and proposed locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOMETERS

A. Adjustable angle, nine inch (9") long scale, mercury type with range selected to read center scale at normal operating conditions; extension necks and bulb style selected to suit application; armored elements on duct thermometers. Acceptable: H.O. Trerice Co BX93403-1/2 and BS99006 or equivalent.

2.2 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Provide for each thermometer in piping system. Sockets: Brass with extension neck to suit thickness of insulation and finish 3/4" NPT.



2.3 THERMOMETER TEST WELLS

A. Brass with extension neck to suit insulation cap with chain; 1/2" NPT; extension neck where necessary to penetrate insulation.


A. Use at Contractor's option as specified in Part 3 of this section. Body of brass or 316 stainless steel. Valve core of neoprene for applications to 200oF and of Nordel for applications to 275oF. Rated for pressure to 1000 psig. Screwed hexagonal cap and gasket. Size 1/4" NPT or 1/2" NPT as applicable. Length 1-1/2" or 3" as applicable to penetrate and allow for insulation. Designed for taking temperature and pressure readings when used with recommended probes. Acceptable: Pete's Plug, Standard or XL Size as manufactured by Peterson Equipment Company, Inc., Richardson, TX 75081; Sisco P/T plugs; or equivalent.

1. Test Kit: Provide Owner with one companion test kit suitable for taking temperature and pressure readings with test plugs. Provide to Architect/Engineer written certification of delivery of test kit to Owner; certification shall be signed by Owner's authorized representative. Duplicate test kit is not required under this section if provided under section describing gauges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install test wells, separable sockets, and thermometers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate in such a manner (adjusting mounting angle as required) as to permit easy reading of all thermometers associated with a single heat transfer device from a single point on the floor (or working platform).

3.2 THERMOMETERS IN PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install in such a manner as to give accurate reading of actual conditions. Make allowance for proper (unrestricted) flow by installing in oversized fitting in line sizes two inches (2") and under.

3.3 THERMOMETERS IN DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Install in such a manner as to give accurate reading of actual conditions.

3.4 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Protect equipment from damage from time of receipt until final acceptance. Thoroughly clean thermometers, wells and like items of all dirt and construction debris prior to requesting final inspection. Thermometers which become damaged during course of construction shall be repaired to "as new" condition or shall be replaced with new equipment.



3.5 LOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS

A. Provide as described at locations in this section unless individual locations are otherwise specifically shown on drawings.

3.6 THERMOMETER LOCATIONS

A. Provide permanent thermometers and companion wells at the following locations:

1. Fluid inlet and outlet of:

a. Each water coil in each air handling unit.b. Each water inlet and outlet of each chiller.

2. Where elsewhere specified or indicated on the drawings.

3.7 THERMOMETER TEST WELL LOCATIONS

A. Provide thermometer test wells at:

1. Inlets and outlets of each water coil at each unit which is not a packaged air handling unit or a built-up air handling unit (i.e., terminal unit hot water coils, fan coil unit coils, duct mounted hot water coils and similar units).



A. Where a thermometer well and a gauge cock is indicated together as a pair (i.e. side by side), Contractor may, at his option, provide only a single test plug is required. Provide only at the following locations (at Contractor's option in lieu of the test wells specified above and in lieu of the gauge cocks specified in "Gauges" section).

1. Inlets and outlets of each water coil at each unit which is not a packaged air handling unit or a built-up air handling unit (i.e. terminal unit hot water coils, fan coil unit coils, duct mounted hot water coils and similar units.)


3.9 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install near pressure gauge cocks and flow meter ports where practical but not to deflect flow and cause raise readings of such other instruments.

B. Install to cause least possible condensation.

C. Thermometers shall be easily readable by person in normal position; adjust mounting configuration accordingly.

D. Provide pipe extensions where installation is in pipe with diameter smaller than insertion length or install in oversized pipe sections.



E. Install thermometers and test wells as follows so that wells will hold gauge oil without spilling when wells are being used for testing and balancing:

1. In horizontal pipe so that the well is in the top quadrant of the pipe and is not less than 45o from vertical.

2. In vertical pipe so that the well is 45o from vertical.



FLOW STATIONS, VENTURI TYPE 23 05 22 - 1

SECTION 23 05 22 - FLOW STATIONS, VENTURI TYPE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide venturi type flow stations, where specified and where indicated on piping plans and schematics, to enable the proper flow balancing of systems.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions" for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.


1. HVAC piping systems.2. Performance verification.3. Insulation.

1.4 PRESSURE RATING

A. Be recommended and rated for the pressure conditions occurring at each individual venturi installation location for the particular fluid flow system in which the venturi is installed.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data on: dimensions; working pressure; body pattern; installation instructions including upstream and downstream clearances; indicating and permanent pressure losses; tagging; accessories; and materials and finish.

1.6 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Gerand2. Barco



3. Flowset4. Olympic5. Preso

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOW STATIONS

A. Venturi type, selected to provide an indicating differential pressure, at the design flow rate, between ten (10) and forty (40) inches of water. Permanent pressure loss shall not exceed twenty-five (25) percent of indicated flow rate differential pressure. Stations up to and through two inch (2") in size shall be brass with screw end connections. Stations two and one-half inch (2-1/2") and above shall be steel with butt weld ends.

2.2 FLOW STATION ACCESSORIES

A. Each flow station shall be provided with the following accessories:

1. Quick Disconnect Valves: Provide quick disconnect valves, compatible with the master meter, for each meter tap of each flow station.

2. Safety Shut-Off Valves: Provide a safety shut-off valve between each quick disconnect valve and its respective meter tap. Shut-off valves shall be mounted on the flow station with brass pipe nipples of sufficient length to bring the valve clear of specified insulation and finish.

B. Tag: Provide a metal (or paper bonded between two (2) sheets of plastic) identification tag attached to each flow station with a brass chain of sufficient length to allow tag to clear the specified insulation and finish. Tag shall clearly show: Venturi series and size, station identification, and meter reading at flow required by approved piece of equipment.

C. Master Meter: Six inch (6") round dial, dry type meter supplied with white on black scale reading from zero (0) to fifty (50) inches of water differential pressure. Meter shall be mounted in a portable fiberglass (rot proof) carrying case complete with two (2) ten foot (10') lengths of one-quarter inch (1/4") high pressure high temperature connecting hose with quick disconnect socket valves, vent valves, vent hoses, operating instructions, and flow station capacity curves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATION

A. Provide venturi type flow stations where shown on drawings. The flow station locations shown on drawings or otherwise indicated are diagrammatic in nature and are intended basically to show the requirement for flow measurement relative to a specific piece of equipment or portion of the system and not the exact physical location of the device. The exact physical location shall be determined using field measurements relating to the specific piping arrangement and the manufacturer's requirements relating to upstream and downstream clearances.



3.2 PIPING

A. The actual installation or incorporation of flow stations into the piping system shall be done as work of the Section covering the piping system involved.

B. Install flow stations in accord with manufacturer's recommendations including increases or decreases in pipe size at point of installation together with minimum recommended lengths of straight run pipe before and after points of installation.

3.3 BALANCING

A. Shall be done, using the master meter specified hereinbefore, as work of the section describing test and balance. At the conclusion of the test and balance work the meter shall be turned over to, and shall become the property of, the Owner. Include a receipt for delivery of the meter, complete as specified herein, in good condition as a part of the Operating and Instruction manuals.



VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES: HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 23 - 1

SECTION 23 05 23 - VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES: HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide those valves, cocks and specialties which are required for the HVAC piping systems. These items include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Gate valves.2. Check valves.3. Ball valves.4. Cocks and plug valves.5. Drain valves.6. Butterfly valves.7. Backflow preventers.8. Strainers.9. Safety valves.10. Pressure relief valves.11. Air vents.12. Flow indicating/balancing valves.13. Pump suction guide/strainer/elbows.14. Pump discharge/flow control valves.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of the Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.


1. Piping systems.2. Pumps.3. Insulation.4. Equipment connected to piping systems in which work of this section is applicable.5. Air control equipment.6. Work which is described in Divisions 22 and 23 which relate to the plumbing systems and

which requires valves, cocks and specialties shall be provided in compliance with this Section unless requirements of Divisions 22 and 23 specifically state otherwise.



1.4 APPLICABLE SYSTEMS

A. These valves, cocks and specialties are intended for application in, but not necessarily limited to, the following HVAC piping systems as applicable to this project.

1. Chilled water systems.2. Condenser water systems.3. Other related HVAC piping systems.

1.5 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES

A. Valves, cocks and specialties may not be indicated in every instance on the drawings, but whether or not shown, all valves, cocks and check valves necessary to the proper operation of the system shall be furnished and installed in an approved manner and location. Valves shall have rising stems except in locations where space is limited; in these locations non-rising stem valves of equivalent material and pressure class will be accepted.

1.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS


1. Mueller2. Hammond3. Crane4. Powell5. Walworth6. Lunkenheimer7. Stockham8. Williams-Hager9. APCO10. Metraflex11. ACFR12. Keystone13. Centerline14. Demco15. Gerand16. Griswold17. Aeroquip18. Dezurick19. Watts20. Maxwell & Moore21. Bell & Gossett22. Beaton-Cadwell23. McDonnell Miller24. Maid-O-Mist25. Sarco26. Nibco27. Jamesbury28. Taco29. Wheatley Pump & Valve



30. Conbraco31. Grinnell32. McDonald33. Flow Design34. Weksler

B. Any model numbers listed are from one or more of these manufacturers and are given to provide an example of the item(s) required.

1.7 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings.

1.8 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATINGS

A. Temperature: Unless otherwise specified, ratings shall be as follows for all components specified herein.

1. Chilled water systems: 150oF2. Condenser water systems: 150oF

B. Pressure: Unless otherwise specified, all components must be of pressure class and rating to be recommended for operation at the following maximum allowable non-shock pressure ratings.

1. Chilled water systems: 150 psig2. Condenser water systems: 150 psig

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GATE VALVES

A. 3" and smaller: Threaded or solder pattern as applicable, rising stem, iron wheel, rough brass body, solid wedge disc, screwed or union bonnet and finished gland nut, 150 psi class. Types as follows:

1. Threaded Pattern: Crane 431, Powell 514S, Walworth 56, Lunkenheimer 2151, Stockham B-122.

2. Soldered Pattern: Powell 1842S, Lunkenheimer 2151, Stockham B-124.

B. 3-1/2" and Larger: Flanged, cast iron body, brass trim, brass seats, rising stem and iron wheel, 125 psi class. Types as follows: Crane 465-1/2, Powell 1793, Walworth 726F, Lunkenheimer 1430, Stockham G-623.

2.2 GLOBE VALVES

A. 2-1/2" and Larger: Flanged, iron body, yoke bonnet, bronze trim and disc.

B. 2" and Smaller: Screwed, bronze body, union bonnet composition disc.



2.3 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing type:

1. 3-inches and Smaller: Threaded or solder pattern as applicable, pressure rating of not less than 200 psi threaded pattern and 125 psi solder pattern, wye pattern swing check, rough brass body, finished gland nut, regrinding bronze disc.

2. 4-inches and Larger (125 psi maximum working pressure): Flanged pattern, iron body, swing check, renewable brass seat, disc and trim. Types: Crane 373, Powell 559, Walworth M-928F, Lunkenheimer 1790, Stockham G-931.

3. 4-inch and Larger (200 psi maximum working pressure): Flanged brass-ferrosteel body, swing check, renewable brass seat, disc and trim. Types: Crane 39E, Powell 576, Walworth M-970F, Lunkenheimer 323.

B. Wafer Type:

1. 3-inch and Larger: Flanged pattern, globe type, semi-steel body, stainless steel spring, bronze disc and bronze seat ring. Types: Williams-Hager Figure 636; APCO Series 600; Mueller Nos. 105, 107, 109 and 113; Metraflex Series 900.

2.4 PLUG VALVES AND BALANCING COCKS

A. General: Semi-steel, lubricated type, bolted cover or gland, position indication dial, full port, teflon coated plug. Over 6-inches shall have a geared or worm drive operator.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: Screw pattern Powell F-2200, Walworth 1700, ACF R1430.

C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Flanged end. Powell F2201, Walworth 1700F, ACF R 1431.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES

A. General: Use only for low pressure drainage service.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: Either threaded or soldered ends, class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, disc with 3/4" hose thread outlet connect.

1. Threaded Pattern: Crane 410, Stockham B-100.2. Soldered Pattern: Crane 1320, Stockham B108.

2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Pattern: Valves shall be of the threaded lug body type. All valves shall have extended necks for insulation clearance.

B. Body: Semi-steel or cast iron or pattern specified hereinbefore.

C. Disc: Bronze or semi-steel with welded nickel edge, 416 stainless steel shaft, bronze bearings, and Hycar seals.

D. Seat: Hycar, bonded to a rigid reinforcing ring which is held in place by a metal retaining ring. All valves shall be capable of bubble tight shut-off at pressure differentials of 200 psig, and 200 psig dead end shut-off.



E. Operators: Valves 2" through 6" shall have lever type actuator capable of infinite position (or minimum of 10 locking positions) and shall have adjustable memory stop. Valves 8" and larger shall have gear type actuator with chain wheel, hand wheel or crank type operating mechanisms, adjustable opening and closing memory stops, and position indicator. All valves 4" and larger located more than 6'-0" above the floor shall be provided with chain wheel and chain. Provide stem extensions (in addition to insulation clearance extension specified hereinbefore) as required to place operators in an easily accessible location free of interference with adjacent piping, equipment structure, and the like.

F. Manufacturers: Grinnell, Keystone, Center-Line, Demco, DeZurick.

2.7 BALL VALVES

A. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Threaded or soldered ends, port area equal to or greater than connecting pipe diameter, Class 125, two piece bronze body, bronze ball, bronze stem, teflon seat and seals. Acceptable manufacturers; Crane, Hammond, Jamesbury, Nibco, Stockham, and Walworth.

2.8 CALIBRATED BALANCING AND FLOW MEASURING VALVES

A. 1/2" to 2": Globe type providing flow balancing, flow measurement, positive shut off, and drain connection. Balancing valves shall be provided with vernier-type setting with adjustment range through four 360 degree turns of handwheel. Valves shall have hidden memory feature to prevent tampering. Valves shall be provided with meter connections having positive shut off valves. All metal parts shall be of nonferrous, pressure die-cast, nonporous Ametal Copper Alloy. Valve shall provide accurate flow control regardless of valve orientation. Provide form-fitting polyurethane insulation cover. Design basis Armstrong CBV I. Acceptable Alternates: Accepted equivalents by Bell & Gossett, Taco, and Preso.

B. 2-1/2" to 6": Globe type providing flow balancing, flow measurement, and positive shut off. Balancing valves shall be provided with vernier-type setting with adjustment range through eight 360 degree turns of handwheel. Valves shall have hidden memory feature to prevent tampering. Valves shall be provided with meter connections having positive shut off valves. Valves shall be cast iron with brass trim. Design basis Armstrong CBV II. Acceptable Alternates: Accepted equivalents by Bell & Gossett, Taco and Preso.

C. Provide Owner: One portable differential pressure gauge kit of same manufacturer as valves. Kit shall be housed in a hand-carrying case and shall contain one 0-135" W.C. and one 0-60 foot pressure gauge, 5 foot meter hoses with disconnect ends, positive shutoff valves, operating instructions, and flow versus pressure drop curves for each size valve installed.

2.9 FLOW CONTROL VALVES, PRESSURE COMPENSATING, ACCESSIBLE

A. Automatic pressure compensating flow control valves which operate as mechanically independent devices on a mechanically based variable orifice principal. Provide where specified and where indicated on piping plans and schematics, to enable the proper flow balancing of systems. Acceptable manufacturers: Griswold, Taco.

B. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at least 14 times the minimum required for control.



C. Control mechanism of valve shall be a self-contained, open-chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages to eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be type 300 passivated stainless steel. No plated materials are acceptable.

D. Control valve mechanism shall be accessible for changeout if needed without disconnecting the piping system in which it is installed.

E. Valves shall be available in four pressure differential ranges, with the minimum range requiring less than 2 psi to control flow. Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures.

F. Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with a valve kit consisting of 1/4 inch x 2 inch minimum size nipples, quick-disconnect valves (to be located outside of insulation), and fittings suitable for use with companion measuring instruments.

2.10 STRAINERS

A. General: Y-type.

B. Body: Cast iron, ductile iron, cast or forged steel as required for specified working pressure of piping system.

C. Screen: 315 stainless steel or monel. Free area not less than three times inlet area.

1. Perforations: 1/8" mesh for sizes to 8-inches. 5/32" mesh for sizes 10-inches and larger.

D. Connections:

1. Straight thread and gasket to 2-inch size.2. Flanged 2-1/2 inches and larger.3. Solder pattern when used in copper piping systems.

E. Bolted cover in 2-1/2 inch and larger.

F. Gate Valve: On 2-1/2 inch size and larger, provide a gate valve on each strainer cover blowdown connection; gate valve to be full size of blowdown connections.

2.11 SAFETY VALVES

A. General: ASME rated as shown on the drawings and/or required by applicable codes.

B. Manufacturers: Manning, Maxwell & Moore, Watts Regulator, or Bell & Gossett Co.

2.12 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. One-half (1/2) or three quarter (3/4) inch size, brass, iron or steel, ASME rated.



2.13 AIR VENTS

A. Automatic:

1. 150 psi Working Pressure: Metraflex MV-15, Crane 976, Sarco 13W, Armstrong 1AV.2. 75 psi Working Pressure: Maid-O-Mist #7, Bell & Gossett #7, Hoffman 79.

B. Manual: Brass manual cock, Crane 700 Series, with hose thread adapter.

2.14 PUMP SUCTION GUIDE/STRAINER ELBOW

A. Sizes Allowable: 2" through 12".

B. Construction: At the Contractor's option, in lieu of strainer and long sweep elbow, provide at each pump a suction guide/strainer elbow. Units shall consist of cast iron angle type body (175 psi pressure rated) with cast iron inlet vanes and a combination stainless steel diffuser strainer with 3/16" or 1/3" diameter openings for pump protection. (Unit shall be equipped with a disposable brass or bronze fine mesh start up strainer which shall be removable after 30 days). The body outlet pipe size shall be equal to the pump suction pipe size. The unit shall be provided with an adjustable support foot to relieve piping strains from the pump suction, threaded pressure gage tap at the body inlet and blowdown tapping in bottom.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong Pumps, Inc., Taco, Inc.; Bell & Gossett or equivalent.

2.15 PUMP DISCHARGE/FLOW CONTROL VALVES

A. Allowable Sizes: 1-1/2" through 10".

B. Construction: At Contractor's option, install pump discharge valves on each pump discharge line in lieu of separate shutoff valve, check valve, and balance cock. Pump discharge flow control shall be cast-iron valve body, pressure rated for 175 psi, maximum operating temperature of 300oF. Provide check valve and calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and shutoff. Bronze gland, stainless steel stem, brass or bronze seat, graphited asbestos packing or double "O" ring seal straight or angle pattern. Angle pattern valves shall be provided with adjustable support foot.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong Pumps, Inc., Bell & Gossett; Taco, Inc.; or equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install valves in horizontal piping with the valve stem in the vertical upright position.

B. Install valves to provide adequate clearance to permit easy operation of the valve hand wheel and permit servicing of the valve packing.

C. Provide blow down valve on 1-1/2" and larger strainers (except refrigerant piping). Use valve not less than 1/2 strainer blow down outlet size.



3.2 VALVES AND COCKS

A. All valves, balancing cocks and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panels for all concealed valves. Where gate valves are indicated on the drawings, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish butterfly valves, provided they are in compliance with these specifications. Where butterfly valves are used, they shall be installed between properly spaced flanges, then run to the full open position before mounting bolts are tightened in order to insure a balanced pressure on the seat and prevent distortion.

3.3 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Install pressure relief valves where specified or indicated on the drawings. Pipe to spill over floor drain or service sink. Provide pressure expansion device for all valves set for 150-psig or greater.

3.4 PUMP DISCHARGE FLOW CONTROL VALVES

A. Where such valves are used, install pump discharge/flow control valves on each pump discharge. Install in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward position; allow clearance above stem for check valve mechanism removal. After hydronic system has been completed, mark calibrated name plate with stripe of yellow lacquer to permanently mark final balanced position.

B. Install adjustable foot support for angle pattern valves to carry weight of discharge piping.

3.5 SAFETY VALVES

A. Safety valves to have valve spindle enclosure with gland seal to minimize leakage and manual lift lever to check discharge required. Cut discharge pipe from safety valve on a 45 degree angle, pipe to floor and direct toward or into floor drain (unless noted otherwise on the drawings).

3.6 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS

A. Install automatic air vents with inlet isolation cock at locations indicated on drawings and at high points of hot and chilled water piping systems. Pipe vent discharge to drain pan, plumbing trap or to outside of building.

3.7 DRAIN VALVES

A. Install drain valves at the base of all water piping risers (both supply and return) and at all low points in the piping system.

3.8 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves may be installed in lieu of gate valves for all individual fan coil unit supply and return piping 1" and smaller.



3.9 VALVED GAUGE CONNECTIONS

A. Contractor shall provide valved gauge connections at diffuser inlet and pump suction to indicate when cleaning is needed. Install on pump suction inlets, adjust foot support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and shutoff valve in blowdown connection. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but prior to balancing of hydronic piping system, remove disposable fine mesh strainer.

3.10 CALIBRATED BALANCING AND FLOW MEASURING VALVES

A. Provide flow indicating balancing valves where shown on drawings. The locations shown on drawings or otherwise indicated are diagrammatic in nature and are intended basically to show the requirement for flow measurement and shut-off relative to a specific piece of equipment or portion of the system and not the exact physical location of the device. The exact physical location shall be determined using field measurements relating to the specific piping arrangement and the manufacturer's recommendations relating to upstream and downstream clearances. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations including increases or decreases in pipe size at points of installation together with minimum recommended lengths of straight run pipe before and after points of installation. Balancing shall be done, using the master meter specified hereinbefore, as work of the section describing test and balance. At the conclusion of the test and balance work the meter shall be turned over to, and shall become the property of, the Owner.

3.11 MECHANICAL ACTUATORS

A. Install mechanical actuators with chain operators where indicated, and where valves 4" and larger are mounted more than 7'-0" above floor in mechanical rooms, chiller rooms, boiler rooms; and where recommended by valve manufacturer because of valve size, pressure differential or other operating condition making manual operation difficult.



AIR CONTROL EQUIPMENT, HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 23 05 24 - 1

SECTION 23 05 24 - AIR CONTROL EQUIPMENT, HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide a complete system of makeup water and/or air control equipment for each separate chilled water and/or hot water system as indicated on drawings and as specified herein.




1. HVAC water piping systems.2. Valves, cocks and specialties for HVAC systems.

1.4 TERMINOLOGY

A. Compression tanks and expansion tanks shall be considered the same regardless of terminology.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment shall be sized as indicated on drawings.

2.2 EXPANSION TANK(S)

A. Tank: Steel, ASME approved, 125 psig working pressure.

B. Trim: Gauge glass, gauge cocks and all necessary tappings including union connected gauge valves, stainless steel trim, acrylic gauge tube, drain cock, built-in check valves. Acceptable: Penberthy Series 205; Eugene Ernst Products Model EEP 203 or equivalent.

C. Tank Fitting: Designed to control air flow into tank while preventing free interchange of water between tank and system; manual air vent tube; 125 psig; Bell & Gossett ATF or ATFL Series or equivalent.



D. Manufacturer: Taco, Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, John Wood Company or equivalent.

2.3 AIR SEPARATION DEVICE(S) GENERAL

A. General:

1. ASME approved and stamped.2. 125-psig working pressure.3. Cast iron or steel.

B. Recommended by manufacturer to be suitable for operation with flow rate indicated with pressure drops not in excess of that indicated.

C. Tangential type which operates on low velocity vortex principle of separation of free air from system.

D. Strainer, built-in accessible type.

E. Dimensions suitable for available space.

F. Separators with inlet and outlet connections four inches (4") and larger shall be provided with threaded couplings factory welded to shell for pipe support lets.

G. Design Basis: Bell & Gossett "Rolairtrol", Armstrong, Taco or equivalent.

2.4 AIR VENTS

A. Automatic Air Vents: Male pipe thread connection (3/4 inch minimum); brass body; brass or stainless steel float; check valve feature to prevent air re-entry; drain connection; 300oF operating temperature.

1. 150-psig operating pressure: Suitable for 450-psig hydrostatic pressure. Hoffman No.78, Metraflex MV-15, Crane #976, Sarco 13W or Armstrong 1AV or equivalent.

2. 75-psig working pressure: Suitable for 200-psig hydrostatic pressure. Hoffman No.79, Maid-O-Mist #7, Bell & Gossett #7 or equivalent.

B. Manual Air Vents: Brass, suitable for 500 psig operating pressure and 300oF operating temperature, needle valve type, 1/8 inch size minimum, Trerice No. 735, Crane 700 Series or equivalent.

C. Drain Tubing: Type M copper.

2.5 MAKEUP WATER ASSEMBLY(S)

A. Provide for each closed loop chilled water and hot water system. Use the following components or their equivalent:

B. Reducing Valve(s): Brass body, 3/4-inch or greater F.I.P.T. connections, brass trim, built-in strainer, anti-siphon check valve, extra large diaphragm, adjustable twenty-five (25) to sixty (60) psig. Acceptable: Bell & Gossett #7 or an accepted equivalent.



C. Relief Valve: Brass body, 3/4-inch or greater M. x F.I.P.T. connections, brass trim, diaphragm operated, seventy-five (75) psig setting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all air separators, compression tanks and similar items in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Test piping systems prior to the application of any insulation and prior to their being rendered inaccessible by the progress of the work. Pressure test the makeup water piping as specified for the potable water piping system.

C. Pipe, valves and fittings shall be kept clean and protected from entrance of dirt, non-potable water and construction debris during the installation process.

D. Refer to sections covering closed loop hydronic systems. Coordinate work of other trades as regards their interface on makeup water piping.

E. Connect water make-up line to pipe which connects air separation device to compression tank assembly. Pipe size from make-up water connection to air separation device shall be same size as make-up water line.

3.2 EXPANSION TANK ASSEMBLY(S)

A. Drain: Provide valved 3/4 inch minimum diameter tank drain to a point six inches or less above nearest mechanical room floor drain.

B. Support: Securely support from roof or floor structure and/or from masonry wall(s). Submit shop drawings showing method of support if such drawings are required by Architect/Engineer.

C. Insulation: Insulate if and as specified elsewhere.

3.3 AIR SEPARATION DEVICE

A. Remove and clean strainer after 24 hours and 30 days of system operation.

B. Isolate air separator with gate valves.

C. Install so strainer is accessible.

D. Provide valved blowdown drain.

E. Insulate; insulation finish shall match finish of connecting piping insulation.



3.4 AIR VENTS

A. Use automatic vents in concealed spaces. Provide tubing discharge to drain pan, plumbing trap, exterior of building or other approved location. Discharge at inconspicuous and safe location. Install automatic air vents with inlet isolation cock.

B. Provide manual vents at each heating and cooling water coil in accordance with coil manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Provide automatic vents as follows:

1. High points of all main hot water and chilled water piping.2. In all hot water and chilled water pipe sections which form an inverted trap.3. Where necessary to completely and properly vent all air which may accumulate in piping

circuits.4. Where otherwise indicated.

D. Provide automatic air vents with gate valve or ball valve in pipe nipple to air vent so that air vent can be removed without affecting pipe system operation.

3.5 MAKEUP WATER ASSEMBLY(S)

A. Provide as follows if not indicated in Divisions 22 and 23 which describe plumbing interface or if not shown on drawings:

1. 1-1/4-Inch (Less if Indicated) Make-up Assembly:

a. Automatic feed line with the following in series in direction of flow: Gate valve, pressure regulating valve with built-in check valve feature, check valve, vacuum breaker, pressure relief valve and gate valve.

2. 1-1/2-Inch (Greater if Indicated) Make-up Assembly:

a. Automatic feed line in parallel with manual feed line.b. Automatic feed line with the following in direction of flow:

(a) Pressure regulating valve with built-in check valve, vacuum breaker and pressure relief valve.

c. Manual feed line with gate valve and check valve.d. Gate valve common to both manual and automatic lines on each side of the parallel

system.e. Connect chilled water and hot water make-up line to pipe which connects air

separation device to compression tank assembly. Pipe size from make-up water connection to air separation device shall be same size as make-up water line.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment, piping systems, HVAC systems, plumbing systems and fire protection systems.




1. Piping systems.2. Duct systems.3. Equipment items.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Provide specific data on hangers, stands, clamps, rollers, guides, shields, anchors and their proposed application. Submit detailed shop drawings, showing method of support and anchoring for all piping and equipment as follows:

1. Piping Systems:2. Scaled single line piping plans superimposed on structural construction drawings. Scale

shall be minimum 1/4" = 1'-0". Piping which is three inch (3") diameter and smaller may be omitted from these shop drawings. Drawings shall clearly indicate the location and type of each and every insert, hanger, stand, support, guide, isolator and anchor; and shall also indicate the size, type locations and method of attachment for all miscellaneous structural steel required.

3. Sectional drawings, sketches and other details as may be required to clearly communicate the method of support, anchoring, guiding and vibration isolation.

4. Show details of any typical floor or wall penetrations including: riser clamp, pipe sleeve, and provisions for water stop to prevent the water travel between penetrations.



1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings.

1.6 MANUFACTURER


1. F&S Manufacturing Corp.2. Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS

A. Hangers In Contact With Copper Piping: Shall be copper plated or teflon coated. Hangers shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E, Type 9. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C, or equivalent.

B. Hangers (other than in Contact with Copper Piping): Shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Hangers shall be of the following types:

1. Pipe 3" and Larger: Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E, Type 1. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 260 or equivalent.

2. Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: Fed. Spec. WW-172E, Type 6. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 104 or equivalent.

2.2 ISOLATORS

A. Refer to the Section, if included in this Division, which describes vibration isolation.

2.3 PIPE ROLLER STANDS

A. Shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 47. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 171, or equivalent.

2.4 PIPE ROLLER HANGERS

A. Pipe Roller Hangers: Shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E, Type 42. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 171, or equivalent.

2.5 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 256, or equivalent.



2.6 PIPE RISER CLAMPS

A. Pipe Riser Clamps: Shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 8.

2.7 INSULATION SHIELDS

A. Shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 41. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 167, or equivalent.

2.8 BEAM CLAMPS

A. Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 29. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links, or equivalent.

2.9 INSERTS

A. Preset Type: Malleable iron with removable interchangeable nuts having lateral adjustment of not less than one and five-eighths inches. Continuous inserts shall have a capacity of 2,000 lb. per foot and shall be hooked over reinforcing. Acceptable: C-B Universal Fig. 282; Unistrut Products Co., P3200 or P3300; B-Line Systems, Inc., Series B- 32.1, or equivalent.

2.10 ROD

A. Carbon steel, black threaded bolt ends or continuous thread, sized with safety factor of five (5). Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146, or equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 PIPE

A. General: Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied, there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulation, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger or support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. Hangers and supports shall not be placed at greater than the following intervals:

1. Pipe 1" and Smaller: Eight foot (8') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows, and tees).

2. Pipe 1-1/4" through 2-1/2": Ten foot (10') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows and tees).



3. Pipe 3" and Larger: Fourteen foot (14') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows, and tees).

3.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment supports shall be as otherwise indicated on the drawings or in the specifications.

3.4 DUCTWORK

A. Refer to Sections describing ductwork.

3.5 POWDER (GUNPOWDER) ACTUATED FASTENERS

A. Not allowed.



VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 - 1

SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide vibration isolation supports for all equipment and piping as may be required to prevent transmission of vibration to building structure. This shall include air handling units, fans, piping, pumps and similar items.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Submittal data shall show type, point loading information, size and deflection of each isolator proposed and any other information as may be required for the Engineer to check isolator selections for compliance with specifications. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification: Consolidated Kinetics; Mason Industries; Amber-Booth; Keflex; Flexonics; Vibration Eliminator Company or equivalent. Any model numbers listed are from one or more of these manufacturers and are given to provide an example of item(s) required.


A. All vibration isolation equipment shall be both recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for each particular application on this project.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless otherwise noted, spring type vibration isolators shall be used for all motor driven equipment. It shall be the responsibility of isolation manufacturer to determine the amount of spring deflection required for each isolator to achieve optimum performance, prevent the transmission of objectionable vibration and meet noise criteria referenced herein.

2.2 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Steel components shall be phosphated and painted. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welded slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer.

B. All isolators exposed to weather shall have steel parts PVC coated or hot-dip galvanized. Aluminum components shall be etched and painted. Nuts, bolts and washers may be zinc-electroplated.

2.3 BASIC ISOLATORS

A. General: Unit designations indicated are Architect/Engineer designations. Each of the following basic isolators may not be applicable to a specific installation application. See PART 3, "EXECUTION".

B. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Same internal diameter as the pipe in which the connector is installed (not necessarily internal diameters of inlets or outlets of equipment).

1. Both recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect/Engineer to be suitable for handling the conveyed fluid at all conditions (maximums and minimums of temperatures, pressures, velocities, etc.) encountered for each particular application.

2. Of proper design to absorb the combination of vibratory and/or expansion or contraction motions (lateral and/or axial and/or angular) encountered at each installation point (for example, do not use hose type where axial motion is encountered at the installation point unless so recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect.

3. Stainless steel bellows type (Unit SSB): Heavy duty steel restraining rods and spacers; laminated steel bellows; steel flanges; permit axial, lateral and angular movement; rated to withstand 180oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure for chilled water; 250oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure for heating hot water; similar to Keflex Series 151 or 301.

4. Stainless steel hose type (Unit SSH): Rated to withstand 180oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure; have flanges except 2-1/2 inch and smaller sizes may have screw type fittings installed with a union at one end or with screw-on flanges at both ends; net flexible lengths shall be at least 6 pipe diameters for pipe up to 5 inch ID and not less than 36 inches for pipe 6 inch ID and greater; corrugated bellows with stainless steel wire braid restraining sheath; similar to Flexonics Type RW, RF or Series 400, Mason Type BSS, Keflex Series SSH.

C. Acoustic Seals (Unit AS): Consist of an S-shaped molded synthetic rubber seal attached with stainless steel clamps to the pipe wall sleeves and to carrier piping. Wall sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger than the carrier pipe and/or its insulation. Amber-Booth Type 301.



D. Neoprene Pads (Unit NP): Waffle or ribbed pattern neoprene pads shall be fabricated from 40-50 Durometer neoprene. Mason Type W.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All isolators shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be properly adjusted prior to requesting final inspection or the performance of any vibration testing specified.

B. Each item of equipment (machinery, piping, etc.) which is provided with vibration isolation equipment shall rest in its intended, proper operating position (i.e. exactly level, etc.) after installation of vibration isolation equipment. Approval of such vibration isolation equipment by Architect/Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

C. Equipment which is specified to rest on concrete housekeeping pads shall have Unit NP pads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 PUMPS, HORIZONTAL BASE MOUNTED

A. Flexible pipe connectors (Unit SSB).

3.3 CHILLERS, WATER COOLED

A. Mount on neoprene pads (Unit NP) on concrete housekeeping pad.

B. Flexible pipe connectors (Unit SSB) at CHW and CW connections.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SUPERVISION

A. The Contractor shall include in his price the cost of the vibration isolation manufacturer or his qualified representative for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Upon completion of the installation and after system is put into operation, the manufacturer or his representative shall make a final inspection and submit his report to the Engineer in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data.



IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide complete identification of the mechanical systems including piping, valves and equipment as noted herein.




1. Piping and the interconnected equipment and component items for the following systems:

a. Chilled water.b. Condenser water.

1.4 APPLICABLE PIPING AND RELATED ITEMS

A. Piping and interconnected equipment and component items for the following systems shall be identified. Identification of the following systems shall not preclude the identification of other systems where identification of such other systems may be specified in other sections. Systems requiring identification as work of this section are:

1. Chilled water.2. Condenser water.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Provide schedule of colors, lettering, tagging, handling and similar items to clearly identify proposed method of identification for mechanical systems.

1.6 DIMENSIONS

A. Pipe dimensions as used in this section refer to the total outside dimensions (diameters) of both the pipe and its insulation (if any).



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with ANSI A13. 1-1975, "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" and OSHA requirements, or as otherwise indicated.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: W. H. Brady Co., 2223 West Camden Road, Milwaukee, WI 53201; Seton Name Plate Corporation, 592 Boulevard, New Haven, CT 06505, or equivalent.

2.2 MARKERS, BANDS, TAGS AND LABELS

A. Markers: Must have approved color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, approved legend letter size, approved length and flow arrow indicator.

1. Pipes 3/4" through 5" O.D.: Seton "Setmark" Type SNA marker or equivalent.2. Pipes 6" O.D. and Greater: Seton "Setmark" Type STR marker or equivalent.

B. Bands: Color coded in minimum widths of 2-1/4" for pipe through 12" O.D. and 4" for pipe 14" O.D. and greater. Brady B-500 Vinyl Cloth, B-350 PermaCode or B-946 Outdoor Film or equivalent as applicable.

C. Valve Tags: Each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number. Be securely attached with meter seals with 4-ply 0.018 copper smooth wire, or brass "S" hooks, or brass jack chain in a manner to allow easy reading. Provide either of the following types:

1. Brass Type: Minimum 19 gauge polished brass; 1-1/2" min. diameter. Acceptable: Seton Style 250-BL or equivalent.

2. Aluminum Color Coded Type: Anodized aluminum; 2": min. diameter. Acceptable: Seton Style 2070 or equivalent.

3. Aluminum Alloy Type: 16 gauge sheet aluminum: depressed type letters filled with black enamel. Face and periphery of satin finish Alumilite, Alcoa 204A2 or equal, free from burns and scratches. Seton Type 4 or equivalent.

4. Fiber Glass Type: 1/16" thick glass fiber reinforced resin. 2" x 2" size of 2-1/2" x 9" size as necessary to identify item. Brady Series No. 2297 or equivalent.

D. Labels: Provide either of the following types:

1. Plastic Type: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic to withstand weather, abrasion, grease, acid, chemical and other corrosive conditions; 1/16" min. thickness. Sized 3/4 x 2-1/2, 1 x 2-1/2, 1 x 3 or 1-1/2 x 4 as necessary to identify item. Seton "Setonite" or equivalent.

2. Aluminum Type: Engraved, flexible, 0.020" thick aluminum. Sized 3/4 x 2-1/2, 1 x 3, 1-1/2 x 4 or 3/6 as necessary to identify item. Seton No. 06505 or equivalent.

E. Provide continuous lengths of magnetic identification tape noting particular system above all underground piping at 12” below grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Apply only after completion of insulation, painting and cleaning work so that final identification is not disfigured by such other work.



B. Coordinate with actual composition and operating temperatures of surface on which identification is to be placed so that proper permanent adhesion of markers and labels to surface is obtained.

C. Locate marking and banding where practical such that groups of pipe are identified at similar location for ease of visual tracking. For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe which are side-by-side at the same general place.

D. Small pipes less than 3/4" diameter may be identified with tags similar to those specified for valves.

E. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service.

3.2 MARKERS AND BANDS

A. Provide on piping as follows:

1. Pipe Concealed in Inaccessible Locations (e.g., Chases, Underground): No identification required.

2. Pipe Concealed in Accessible Locations (e.g., Ceiling Plenums):

a. Markers every 20 feet of pipe length. Bands every 15 feet of pipe length.

3. Pipe Exposed in Equipment Rooms:

a. Markers every 15 feet of pipe length for pipe through 12 inches O.D. and every 30 feet for pipe 14 inches O.D. and greater.

4. Bands every 10' of pipe length for pipe through 12" O.D. and every 25' for pipe 14" O.D. and greater.

5. Exterior Pipe, Exposed: No identification required unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve tags shall be installed on the following items:

1. All motorized valves (except those valves associated with direct control of flow to air handling apparatus whereby the valve may be identified by reference to the item of equipment it serves).

2. All fire protection system valves located in mains and branches (except those valves in fire hose cabinets).

3. All manual valves which perform functions other than isolation of an equipment item for servicing. This includes, but is not limited to, valves in valve stations, remote locations where use is not evident due to proximity of equipment or other piping, and similar locations.

4. Small piping (other than domestic water) where markers are impractical.5. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels.



3.4 VALVE TAG LISTS

A. Prior to substantial completion, provide a complete list of all valves having tags. Indicate the following on such list:

1. Valve size.2. Valve location.3. Valve type.4. Service application.5. Valve manufacturer and model number.6. Pressure class and allowable working pressure.

3.5 LABELS

A. Provide labels of proper size on mechanical system equipment including but not limited to, pumps, chillers, tanks, major piping components such as air separators, air handling equipment, fans, control panels, terminal units, flow stations, reheat coils and similar items.

3.6 COLORS

A. Colors for piping systems and equipment which are required to be painted shall be as follows for those systems which may be applicable to this project:

1. Domestic Cold Water: Medium green enamel with domestic cold water legend.2. Domestic Hot Water and Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: White insulation with yellow

tape or metal bands with domestic hot water (domestic hot water recirculation) legend.3. Chilled Water Piping: Blue mastic with blue tape or bands with chilled water supply (or

return) legend.4. Heating Hot Water Piping: Burnt orange with heating hot water supply (or return) legend.5. Gas Piping: Yellow with gas legend.6. Compressed Air Piping: Light grey with compressed air legend.7. Fire Protection Piping: Red with fire line legend.8. Sprinkler Piping: Red with sprinkler legend.9. Condenser Water Piping: Tan with condenser water supply (or return) legend.10. Roof Drainage Piping: Light green with storm water legend.11. Compressed Air Piping: Black with compressed air legend.12. Natural or L.P. Gas Piping: Yellow with gas legend.13. High (or Medium or Low) Pressure Steam Supply Piping: White insulation jacket or

aluminum jacket with yellow tape or bands with HP (MP, L.P.) steam legend.14. High (or Medium or Low) Pressure Steam Condensate Piping: White insulation or

aluminum jacket with yellow tape or bands with HP (MP, LP) steam legend.15. Equipment Hot Vent Piping (Below 100oF): Light brown with vent legend.16. Equipment Hot Vent Piping (Above 100oF): Light brown tape or bands over insulation or

metal jacket with vent legend.17. Vacuum (Housekeeping): Light olive green with vacuum legend.18. Fuel Oil (Supply, Return, Vent) Piping: Yellow with fuel oil legend.19. Generator Exhaust Piping:

a. Insulated: White insulation with yellow tape or band with generator exhaust legend.b. Bare Pipe and Fittings: Silver (suitable for extra high temperature application).

20. Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping: Brown with sanitary sewer (vent) legend.



21. Electrical conduit (not specified as painted in other divisions of these specifications): Silver.

B. Identification: Coordinate colors and finishes with pipe identification.



PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93 - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Put all work in a state of readiness for final performance verification.

B. Final performance verification shall not begin until the systems are complete and operable in all respects and all related building systems are complete.



B. Refer to the section which describes "Performance Verification, Final".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

This section not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER SYSTEMS

A. Prepare each water system for balancing in the following manner:

1. Open all valves to the full position, including coil stop valves; close bypass valves, and open return line balancing cocks.

2. Clean all strainers.3. Examine fluid in each system to determine that it has been treated and is clean.4. Check pumps for proper rotation.

B. Check expansion tanks for full capacity of water and the absence of air lock.

C. Check all air vents at high points of system for proper installation and free operation. Remove all air from circulating system.

1. Set all temperature controls for full heat or full cooling (as applicable) from all coils.2. Check for proper operation of any automatic bypass valves.


PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY 23 05 93 - 2

3.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Complete Installation: The Contractor shall complete the equipment and system installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer (who will be the sole judge of its state of readiness) prior to advising, the writing, that final performance verification is ready to begin. The Contractor is hereby advised that the Certificate of Substantial Completion will not be issued prior to the completion of final performance verification work and that he should therefore, schedule all other work accordingly allowing no less than 60 days for completion of final performance verification.

B. Clean, Flush and Fill Systems: The Contractor shall include the cleaning, flushing, filling, and venting of all hydronic systems; the setup, check-out, and startup of chemical treatment systems; and the setup, checkout and startup of all equipment as work to be complete prior to the start of final performance verification.

C. Correction of Defects: The Contractor shall promptly and properly correct all defects in workmanship, material, installation and equipment of which he is aware prior to requesting that final performance verification work begin. Once the final performance verification work has begun, the Contractor shall promptly correct all defects in workmanship, materials, installation, and equipment as they are called to his attention by Engineer.

D. Scheduling and Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper scheduling and coordination of work involved in preliminary performance verification. This shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the timely provision of: mechanics, tools, equipment, correction of defects, equipment manufacturer's representatives, test modules, and all other items which may be required.

E. Report: Submit a written report describing and certifying in detail all preliminary performance verification items and tasks that have been performed. Approval of this report by the Architect/Engineer will precede final performance verification.



PERFORMANCE VERIFICATON, FINAL 23 05 94 - 1

SECTION 23 05 94 - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, FINAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 23. Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures as described in this section.



1.4 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY

A. Quality Assurance that T & B Agency is certified by to be either AABC or NEBB. Agency must have been in business a minimum of three years or show that T & B work has been performed on a minimum of ten projects similar in size. Documentation must be submitted to Engineer and SLPS for approval prior to starting any T & B procedures.

1.5 CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP

A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B Agency directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement.

B. Performance verification is specified in this Division 23 only because it relates predominantly to Division 23 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 23 of this section covering performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agreement.

1.6 AGENCY APPROVAL

A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Engineer for approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed.

B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.



1.7 WORK INCLUDED

A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services, tools, test equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and all other work of this section:

1. Review the automatic temperature control and equipment specifications for their respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures for the hydronic systems.

2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives for consideration by the Engineer.

3. During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance verification to confirm that the required piping and equipment, and their respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves, etc., are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing and balancing to be accomplished.

4. T & B Agency will perform a minimum of three (but not less than once per month) field investigations while HVAC Systems and all subcomponents are being installed. Before any field investigations are performed by T & B Agency, they must notify the Engineer and SLPS’s T & B acting representative of date and time of field investigation. Upon completion of field investigation, a written report must be submitted to the Engineer and SLPS’s T & B acting representative.

5. Perform a complete hydronic test and balance of all air conditioning water systems shown and described on the Construction Documents and as further described herein.

6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report.7. T & B Agency must witness and certify all duct leakage test rates and pressure tests on

any piping performed by Mechanical Contractor. All tests certified by T & B Agency must be recorded and submitted in writing to Engineer and SLPS’s T & B acting representative.

1.8 GUARANTY

A. Warranty: The T & B Agency must provide a “National Project Performance Guarantee” as prescribed by AABC or NEBB testing procedures and standards that state AABC or NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the T & B Agency fails to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Additional Tests: Within 60 days of completing any and all T & B “Total System Balance” work and additional testing, adjusting, and balancing is needed to verify report parameters are being maintained, any and all work will be done at the T & B Agency’s expense. Any test the T & B Agency is asked to perform will be submitted in writing to the Engineer and SLPS’s T & B acting representative.

C. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter load occupancy and outside air conditions, the T & B Agency must perform the following tests: summer occupancy and outside design load conditions; winter occupancy and outside design load conditions. Before the T & B Agency performs any opposed seasonal test, he must first notify the Engineer and SLPS’s T & B acting representative in writing. Any and all opposed season test performed by T & B Agency will be at their expense. Any and all opposed season test performed by the T & B Agency must be recorded and submitted to Engineer and SLPS’s acting T & B representative.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to verify the systems' performance.

2.2 REPORT

A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified. Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval or comments.

B. T & B Agency’s testing, adjusting, and balancing report must be submitted on AABC or NEBB registered forms approved by Engineer and SLPS. All report forms must be certified by T & B Agency’s National Certification stamp. All Test, Adjust, and Balancing forms must be approved by SLPS before the commencement of any T & B work.

C. Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10% from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Engineer for his consideration.

D. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent and/or erroneous, the Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T & B Agency shall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and in the presence of the Engineer.

E. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise from any piece of equipment, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for action to the Engineer.

F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report:

1. Motors:

ManufacturerModel and serial numberRated amperage and voltageRated horsepowerRated RPMCorrected full load amperageMeasured amperage and voltageCalculated BHPMeasured RPMSheave size, type and manufacturer

2. Pumps:

ManufacturerModel or Serial number, impeller sizeRated RPM, measured RPMRated head, measured head



Rated pressuresMeasured discharge pressure (full flow and no flow)Measured suction pressure (full flow and no flow)Design GPMInitial/Final Measured GPMOperating headOperating RPM

G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation:

1. All inlet and outlet areas.2. All applicable pipe sizes.3. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations.4. All speeds.5. All voltage and ampere ranges.6. Descriptions of each test method used.7. All name plate data.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION

A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing test and balancing operations and shall include equipment and/or instruments, name, manufacturer, serial number and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with certification as required above. The T & B Agency shall be responsible for the protection from damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.

2.4 LOGS AND FORMS

A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following:

1. All inlet and outlet areas.2. All applicable pipe sizes.3. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations (e.g.,

fluid pressures before and after each pump, temperatures and pressures at supply and return headers and at chiller inlets and outlets, etc.).

4. All motor ampere ranges.5. Descriptions of each test method used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.

B. Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Engineer and Owner.

3.2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY

A. Refer to specification section titled “Performance Verification, Preliminary”.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period. The activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated balancing devices including; the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.

3.4 CORRECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy will significantly affect system balance and performance.

3.5 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE

A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area.

B. Coordination: The installing mechanical and controls contractor must provide an approved factory authorized service representative to assist and support the T & B Agency in the operation and testing of all HVAC Systems, Controls, and EMS Systems and all its subcomponents to ensure Total System Balance can be achieved without lengthy delays.

C. The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings.



3.6 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following requirements as applicable to either or both the hydronic systems and steam systems:

1. Prior to testing and balancing of each system check all flow meters for proper installation, calibration and accuracy.

2. Measure and adjust pump flow capacity to proper quantity.3. Adjust flow through chillers.4. Balance system flows.5. Coordinate equipment operation and output performance with the manufacturer's

representative. Record inlet and outlet temperatures.6. Mark or otherwise record settings of adjustable balancing devices which provide the

design flow requirement.7. For each hydronic system record flow rate, pump inlet and outlet pressures and motor

amperage for each pump for each increment of system flow rate provided by the pumping/piping configuration. Variable speed pumps shall operate as constant volume pumps at maximum speed for purposes of this record.

3.7 OTHER TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. T & B Agency must record any and all HVAC System equipment name plate data, such as Water Pumps of various types and Chillers, and their subcomponents as set fort in AABC and NEBB national standards and testing procedures.

B. T & B Agency will measure and record all electrical performance data on all HVAC Equipment and subcomponents on appropriate T & B forms approved by Engineer and SLPS.

C. T & B Agency will verify and record all automatic control devices are functioning properly.

D. T & B Agency will perform and record sound and vibration measurements on any HVAC equipment and subcomponents directed by the Engineer and SLPS. All sound and vibration measurements must be recorded on appropriate T & B sound/vibration forms approved by Engineer and SLPS.



INSULATION, HVAC 23 07 00 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00 - INSULATION, HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide all work necessary to insulate all equipment, piping, ducts and other items related to the piping and duct systems.


A. Refer to the section, General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.


1. Piping systems.2. Duct systems.3. Cooling equipment.

C. Vessels, tanks, stacks, and other items which contain or convey fluids which are at such temperatures as to create condensation or surface temperatures which are hazardous or where heat loss or gain prohibits proper system operation.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: Refer to the Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Shop drawings shall contain complete descriptive and engineering data, including flame spread and smoke developed ratings (ASTM E84 test method) on all materials and adhesives. Where finishes, covers, or jackets are specified, provide complete data on same. Shop drawings shall contain specified information on: densities, conductivities, conductances, or resistances as required to establish conformance with the specified values or materials.

B. Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings.

C. Commencement of Work: Submit shop drawings before any work is commenced.



1.5 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Do not store fiberglass insulation within the building until it has been "dried in". If no other dry space is available and this insulation must be installed or stored before the building is "dried in" and completely enclosed, provide polyethylene film cover for protection.

1.6 COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Applicable Codes: The total insulation system including insulation, sealant, finishes, etc., shall comply with or exceed all code requirements.

B. NFPA: All materials and adhesives used shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

1.7 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

A. Terminology: Throughout this section, insulation products may be described as regards the location, surface or other point at which they are to be applied. Except in special cases (where a detailed indication or description will be given), the majority of conditions can be defined in whole or in part by use of (but not necessarily limited to) any or all of the following words:

1. "Internal" or "External".2. "Interior" or "Exterior".3. "Concealed" or "Exposed".4. "Protected" or "Unprotected".

B. Definitions: Wordage used to describe locations, surfaces or other points or conditions shall be defined as follows as related to this section. Where the ascertainment or determination of locations, surfaces and other conditions is obvious from the intent of use of the item (e.g., roof-mounted ductwork, underground piping, etc.) or from other information, then the following words may not be required. If any ambiguity should occur, provide bid based on the most severe condition; however, obtain clarification from Architect/Engineer prior to installation:

1. "Internal" and "External": Relates to an item or its surface which is to be insulated or uninsulated. Does not relate to the confines of the building, structure or other entity in which the item is located. (Examples: internal/external surfaces of ductwork, pipe, air handling units or other such items.)

2. "Interior": Relates to the location of an item as to whether the item is within a heated, ventilated, air conditioned or otherwise controlled environment of the building, structure or other entity in which the item is located. "Interior" is always "Protected". (Examples(s): Interior ductwork, interior piping, interior air handling units.)

3. "Exterior": Relates to the location of an item as to whether the item is outside (i.e., exterior to) a heated, ventilated, air conditioned or otherwise controlled environment of the building, structure, facility or other entity which the item serves or relates. "Exterior" generally means that the item is surrounded by the ambient outside environment. "Exterior" is considered "Unprotected" unless otherwise described. (Examples(s): exterior rooftop air handling units, exterior ductwork, exterior cooling tower.)

4. "Concealed" and "Exposed": Relates to the visibility of an item. "Concealed" implies out-of-sight from normal view by an occupant, user or employee of the facility when such person is performing their normal function. "Exposed" implies that the item is readily visible by such a person when that person is performing a normal function.



(Examples(s): "Concealed interior ductwork" would be out-of-sight in a ceiling plenum, whereas "exposed interior ductwork" would be readily visible in a mechanical equipment room or in a room which intentionally had no ceiling system.)

5. "Protected" and "Unprotected": Relates to an exterior item which may or may not be sheltered from the outside elements but which exists in contiguous contact with the ambient environment without benefit of any direct heating, ventilating or air conditioning. (Example(s): Piping or ducts located in an open crawl space beneath a building would be "protected/concealed"; in an open parking garage such piping or ducts would be "protected/exposed". Piping or ducts on a rooftop would be "unprotected" and usually "exposed".)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials: Materials listed are those used as basis of design; equivalent products of acceptable manufacturers will be accepted. Materials must be approved and recommended by the insulation product manufacturer for the particular application(s).

B. Flame and Smoke Ratings: Application of insulation materials may require, in many cases, that the final insulation system comply with NFPA 90A with regard to maintaining a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed/fuel contributed valve of 50 or less. In such cases, verify that the materials comply with the indicated flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

C. Applicability: Products and manufacturers listed may not all be applicable. Use only those products and manufacturers which are indicated as being applicable to a specific insulation condition.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturers which are listed are those manufacturers who may make one or more of the insulation products required. Listing of a manufacturer does not necessarily mean the manufacturer is approved for all applicable insulation conditions. Each listed manufacturer must still comply with the specific requirements of each insulation condition to be acceptable for the particular application. Acceptable manufacturers of insulation-related products include (but are not necessarily limited to) the following: Armstrong; CertainTeed; Childers Products Co.; Knauf; Manville; Owens-Corning; Pittsburg Corning; Rubatex; Upjohn Co.; Duracote Corporation; Ferro Corporation; Dow Corning Corporation; Duro Dyne Corporation; Goodloe E. Moore, Inc.; 3M Co.; United McGill Corporation, Vimasco Corporation; Foster; Gustin-Bacon; Nomaco Inc.; Insulcoustic; Molded Acoustical Products; Lion Nokorode and other manufacturers as may be listed for a specific application.

2.2 BASIC MATERIALS

A. Cellular Glass Insulation: Preformed or block type as indicated or as applicable. Fire, water and vermin retardant; closed cell glass composition; density of 8.5-pcf. Comply with the following: ASTM C 552, "Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation"; Military Specification MIL-I-24244B. Flame spread rating of "5" and a smoke developed rating of "0" as per ASTM E 84. Recommended temperature applications from -450oF to 1200oF when installed in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Pittsburg-Corning Foamglas.

B. Elastomeric Insulation: Preformed (tube), roll or sheet as indicated or as applicable. Nitrile, rubber based, closed cell structure. K factor of 0.28 at 75oF. In tube, roll or sheet form of



3/4-inch thickness or less, ASTM E 84 flame spread rating of "25" or less and smoke developed rating of "50" or less. Recommended temperature applications from -40oF to 220oF when installed in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not install in return air plenums unless flame spread rating and smoke developed rating are within constraints of applicable codes. Manufacturers and/or series: Armstrong "Armaflex"; Manville "Aerotube"; "Rubatex"; Gustin-Bacon "Ultra-Foam".

C. Fiberglass Insulation: Inorganic fibrous glass. Flame spread of "25" or less and smoke developed rating of "50" or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Board: Rigid or semi-rigid form, faced or unfaced as indicated. Stiffness of 475 EI, 800 EI or 1400 EI as indicated.

2. Blanket: Flexible form; faced, unfaced or coated as indicated.3. Preformed: Jacketed or unjacketed as indicated.

D. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed or block type as indicated or as applicable. Asbestos free. Rigid hydrous calcium silicate. K factor of 0.42 at 200oF. Density: 14-pcf. Flame spread rating of "0" and smoke developed rating of "0" as per ASTM E 84. Recommended temperature applications up to 1200 oF. Use where indicated only on equipment and surfaces which generate heat; do not use as a cold-surface insulation.

2.3 INSULATION PRODUCTS, BASIC

A. Type PI-1: Pipe insulation, preformed cellular glass. Pittsburg-Corning "Foamglas" or equivalent.

B. Type PI-2: Pipe insulation, preformed jacketed fiberglass. Jacketed with factory-applied kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier jacket. Jacket closure system of double pressure-sensitive adhesive on longitudinal joints; self-sealing butt strips at circumferential joints; provide positive vapor barrier seal. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.24 at 100oF. Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II; Manville Micro-Lok with AP-T Plus jacket; CertainTeed 500 Snap-On; or equivalent.

C. Type PI-3: Pipe insulation, preformed unjacketed fiberglass. Suitable for field-jacketing. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.23 at 100oF. Owens-Corning Fiberglas No-Wrap, Manville Micro-Lok, or equivalent.

D. Type PI-4: Pipe insulation, preformed segmental rigid calcium silicate. Thickness as indicated; provide single layer where nominal pipe size allows; provide "factory nested" double layer when nominal pipe size so requires for the thickness indicated. Owens-Corning Kaylo; Manville Thermo-12; or equivalent.

E. Type PI-5: Pipe insulation, preformed elastomeric. Rubatex, Armaflex II or equivalent.

F. Type I-1: Cellular glass block insulation. Field formed, fitted and finished as required for the application. Pittsburg-Corning Foamglas or equivalent.

G. Type I-2: Calcium silicate block insulation. Field formed, fitted and finished as required for the application. Owens-Corning Kaylo; Manville Thermo-12; or equivalent.

H. Type I-3: Elastomeric insulation. Field formed, fitted and finished as required for the application. Armaflex, Rubatex or equivalent.



I. Type I-4: Fiberglass flexible blanket insulation. Unfinished, non-combustible, wool-like; composed of long glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.23 at 100oF. Applicable where indicated for boilers, vessels, breaching and stacks operating at up to 1000oF. Finished or held in place by wire ties, metal lath, lagging or as indicated. Owens-Corning Thermal Insulating Wool TIW Type II or equivalent.

J. Type DI-1: Duct insulation, fiberglass flexible blanket wrap. Composed of flexible blanket of glass fiber factory laminated to a reinforced foil kraft (FRK) vapor barrier with a minimum 2-inch taping and stapling flange on one edge. Suitable for operation at temperatures from 40oF to 250oF. Thermal conductivity of 0.31 at 75oF. Minimum density of three-quarter (3/4) pound per cubic foot. Provide in thickness of (2.2) inches unless otherwise specified as 2-1/2 or 3-inch thickness. Owens-Corning All Service Faced Duct Wrap; Manville R-Series Microlite; CertainTeed Standard Duct Wrap; or equivalent.

K. Type DI-2: Duct insulation, fiberglass semi-rigid board. Composed of resin bonded glass fibers faced with a foil scrim-kraft (FSK) reinforced laminate of aluminum foil and kraft bonded to provide a metallic surface finish vapor barrier; alternate vapor barrier facing (if specifically indicated) is an all service jacket (ASJ) of high intensity white bleached, chemically treated kraft paper reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to aluminum foil with fire-retardant adhesive to impart a clean, white appearance. Conductivity (K) of not greater than 0.23 at 75oF. Provide in thickness of one (1) inch unless otherwise indicated. Provide with minimum density of 3-pcf unless 6-pcf is specifically indicated. CertainTeed Industrial Insulation Board Type IB-300 (or IB-600); Manville 800 Series Spin-Glas Type 814 (or 817); Owens-Corning 700 Series Industrial Insulation Board Type 703 (or Type 705); or equivalent.

2.4 INSULATION ADHESIVES, MASTICS, SEALANTS

A. Adhesive (Type A-E1): For joints and seams in elastomeric insulation (Type I-3) not requiring weather protection. Rubatex R-373 Insulation Adhesive; Armstrong 520 Adhesive or equivalent.

B. Joint Sealant (Type JS-CG1): Non-hardening vapor barrier sealant specifically designed for use with cellular glass insulation (Types PI-1, I-1): Foster's 35-40 Foamseal Sealant, Pittsburg-Corning Pittseal 111 Sealant or equivalent.

C. Adhesive (Type A-F1): For adhering fiberglass blanket and board insulations (Types DI-1, DI-2) to metal substrate such as ductwork. Insulcoustic I-C 201, Foster 85-20 or equivalent.

D. Mastic, General Purpose (Type M-GP1): Non hardening vapor barrier general purpose mastic. For use where indicated or otherwise applicable. Foster GPM 35-00 or equivalent.

2.5 INSULATION FINISHES, JACKETS AND COVERS

A. Finishing Coating (Type FC-E1): For weather protection of elastomeric insulations (Types I-3, PI-5). Rubatex 374 coating; Armstrong Armaflex Finish or equivalent.

B. Finish Mastic (Type FM-CG1): For cellular glass insulations (Types PI-1, I-1). Waterproof, weather, acid and alkali resistant asphalt mastic coating for use in the range of -40oF to 200oF (installation must be done when in the 50oF to 120oF range). Pittsburg-Corning Pittcote 300 Vapor and Weather Barrier Finish or equivalent.



C. Finish Fabric (Type FF-CG1): For cellular glass insulations (Types PI-1, I-1). 6 x 6 meshes per inch polyester fabric for reinforcing the finish mastic. Pittsburg-Corning PC Fabric 79 or equivalent.

D. Finish Fabric, General Purpose (Type FF-GP1): Nylon membrane. For use generally with fiberglass duct insulations (Types DI-1, DI-2) at joints or seams or as may be indicated. Apply using Foster GPM 35-00 or equivalent.

E. Jacket, Underground Pipe (Type JP-CG-1): For cellular glass pipe insulations (Type PI-1, I-1) where indicated. Prefabricated laminate containing a 20 x 10 mesh asphalt impregnated glass fabric and a 1-mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of a bituminous mastic. External jacket surface coated with a protective plastic film and internal surface with a special release paper. Apply around cellular glass pipe insulation in a cigarette type wrap with the overlap heat sealed. Seal butt joints in the same manner using a 4-inch wide seal strip of the jacketing. Irregular surfaces of the pipe system shall have the jacket's plastic film burned away prior to application of a 20 x 10 asphalt impregnated mesh which shall be sandwiched between two glove coats of finish mastic (Type FM-CG1).

F. Jacket, Pipe, PVC (Type JP-PVC): All purpose, UL-rated, white vinyl jacket, with or without self-sealing feature. Pittsburg-Corning "UNI-JAC" or equivalent.

G. Jacket, Pipe, Aluminum (Type JP-A1): Aluminum jacketing, 0.016 inches thick, type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, circumferentially corrugated, with a continuously laminated moisture barrier of one mil polyethylene film and a protective layer of 40 lb. virgin kraft paper. Childers Products Co. "Corolon"; General Aluminum Supply Co. (Gasco); Insulcoustic "Alcorjac" or equivalent.

H. Pipe Fitting Covers, PVC (Type PFC-PVC): Insulated polyvinyl-chloride fitting covers in shapes as required; with fiberglass insulation insert. Suitable for temperature range of 0oF to 450oF. Flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or less when kept below 150oF. Acid, alkali and chemical resistant. Suitable for painting if required. Manville Zeston 25/50 PVC Insulated Fitting Covers or equivalent.

I. Pipe Fitting Covers, Aluminum (Type PFC-A1): Aluminum fitting covers, 0.020 inches minimum thickness, type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper prefabricated fitting covers with baked epoxy moisture barrier for pipe sizes through 24". Field fabricate fitting covers for pipe sizes larger than 24" using 0.020 inches thick aluminum roll jacketing with laminated polyethylene/kraft moisture barrier. Childers Products "Ell-Jacs", "Gore Ell-Jacs", "Tee-Jack", "End-Caps", and "Flange Jacs" or equivalent.

2.6 RELATED PRODUCTS

A. Wire (Type W-1): Dead soft, 16-gauge, stainless steel.

B. Straps (Type ST-1): Stainless steel T-304 (18-8) soft annealed with deburred edge with stainless steel wing seals. Childers Products "Febstraps" or equivalent.

C. Tape (Type T-1): High tensile strength rope stock flat back paper pressure sensitive tape. Pittsburg-Corning "PC Tape No. 25" or equivalent.

D. Screws (Type S-1): Aluminum pan head type "A" slotted #8 by 1/2-inch.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Field Forming, Fitting and Finishing: Where preformed insulation products are indicated as being acceptable for a particular application, provide field formed, fitted and finished insulation systems if such application is more practical (such as due to size, configuration or dimensions which may be outside of the availability ranges for size, dimension and/or thickness of preformed products).

B. Pre-installation:

1. Do not apply insulation adhesives, materials or finishes until the item to be insulated has been completely installed and tested and proved tight and suitable for insulation.

2. Prepare surfaces to be clean and dry before attempting to apply insulation.

C. Insulation Shields: Provide hanger or pipe support shields of 16 gage (minimum) galvanized steel over or embedded in the insulation. Shield shall extend halfway up the pipe insulation cover and at least 6" on each side of the hanger. Securely fasten shield with pipe straps at each end.

D. Valves, Cocks and Specialties: Insulate as for the related piping system in which they are located unless otherwise indicated.

E. Factory Pre-insulated Components: Where equipment and other system components are specified in other sections to have factory installed insulation, then no additional insulation is required as work of this section unless additional non-factory-installed insulation is specifically described. Examples of such equipment and components which may not require additional insulation include, but are not necessarily limited to, boiler vessels, chiller evaporators, air handling units, airside terminal units, and similar items.

F. Minimum Thicknesses: Insulation thicknesses which are indicated are minimum thicknesses. Contractor may provide the same insulation material in greater thickness as an aid to installation and handling procedures or due to material availability and procurement considerations.

G. Branch Runouts: Branch runouts are considered to be individual supply/return pipes to individual terminal heating or cooling units (duct mounted coils, airside terminal units with heating coils, fan coil units, humidifiers, and similar small equipment). The supply/return pipe to such units is not considered to be a branch runout if the length of the supply or return pipe exceeds 12'-0" in length to the coil/unit connection.

H. Insulation for Plumbing Systems: See other sections describing insulation for plumbing systems.

3.2 INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Basis: Insulation thicknesses for piping are given for insulation installed in the locations indicated. Thicknesses are based on the various conditions of temperature, usage and environment which are typically encountered.

2. Applicable Thicknesses: All thicknesses as applicable to all conditions may not be given in this section article. Where an insulation thickness for a particular application is



specified to be of other thickness than may be listed in this section article, "INSULATION THICKNESSES FOR PIPING SYSTEMS", then provide the insulation in the thickness indicated in other portion of this section which specifically describes the particular insulation application and its required insulation thickness. Thicknesses for other than piping insulation are given in the specific description of the particular application or description of the particular material used.

3. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise indicated, ambient conditions for the purpose of describing insulation thicknesses are related to cold applications to prevent condensation or excessive heat gain (e.g., chilled water pipe, cold vessels) and are related to hot applications to prevent harm to personnel or to prevent objectionable heat loss to the environment (e.g., hot water pipe, hot vessels, hot stacks).

a. These conditions are generally:

Interior: 80oF and 80% RH.Exterior: 90oF and 80% RH.

4. Thickness Requirements: Thicknesses are given below based on the following information:

a. General type of fluid or process involved (e.g., chilled water, hot water, steam, refrigerant).

b. General location and, if necessary, conditions related to temperature (either or both internal or external to the insulation barrier) and ambient environment of the insulated item.

c. Pipe size range.

B. Chilled Water Piping Systems: Fluid generally considered to be between 40oF and 65oF. Thickness is for cellular glass unless other insulation material is indicated.

Location or Description Pipe Size (inches) Insulation Thickness

Interior Up to 1 1-1/2"Interior 1-1/4 to 4 2"Interior 6 and up 2-1/2"----------------------- ------------------ -----------Exterior Up to 4 2-1/2"Exterior 6 and up 3"----------------------- ------------------ -----------Underground All Sizes 2"----------------------- ------------------ -----------

3.3 CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Interior, Concealed (e.g., ceiling plenums): Insulate with prefabricated, cellular glass pipe insulation (PI-1, I-1). Butter joints with joint sealant (JS-CG1) and secure each section with not less than two wires (W-1). Finish with a layer of fabric (FF-CG1) applied between two glove coats of mastic (FM-CG1). Mastic and fabric shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Interior, Exposed (e.g., central mechanical rooms, air handling unit rooms): Insulate with prefabricated, cellular glass pipe insulation (PI-1, I-1). Butter joints with joint sealant (JS-CG1) and secure each section with not less than two wires (W-1). Finish with jacketing (JP-A1). Secure jacketing with straps. Finish elbows and fittings with mastic (FM-CG1),



reinforced with fabric (FF-CG1); or finish with fitting covers (PFC-A1). Finish materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Exterior, Protected: Same insulation system as for "Interior, Exposed" except thickness as required.

D. Exterior, Unprotected: Same insulation system as for "Exterior, Protected" except thickness as required.

E. Underground: Insulate with cellular glass pipe insulation (PI-1, I-1). Butter joints with joint sealant (JS-CG1) and secure each section with not less than two wires (W-1). Finish with underground jacket (JP-CG1) having 2-inch minimum overlap of the longitudinal seams. Heat seal longitudinal seams with a propane torch. Cover butt joints with a 4-inch wide strip of jacket with the edges heat sealed around the circumference. Precut the jacket to fit the contour or irregular surfaces such as 90o bends, 45o bends, fittings, etc. to which it is to be applied; in addition to heat sealing the jacket on these irregular surfaces, burn away the polyester film and glove a coat of mastic (FM-CG1) on the surface; while this coat is still tacky, embed a 10 x 10 asphalt impregnated fabric (FF-CG1) into the mastic. After this application has dried for not less than one hour, apply another coating of mastic. Caution: Keep mastic away from sparks and open flame and keep container closed when not in use.

F. Underground Expansion Joints, Expansion Elbows and Expansion Loops: Provide oversized insulation telescoped over the adjacent pipe insulation to provide close fit and adequate annular space to allow all movement expected to be encountered through maximum temperature ranges (including idle) of the conveyed fluid. Provide 1-1/2 pcf density fiberglass pipe insulation of thickness equal to the cellular glass insulation beneath the oversized insulation to completely fill the annular space void and yet allow freedom of pipe movement. Comply with insulation manufacturer's recommendations for these conditions or with details on drawings, as applicable.

3.4 DUCT SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Locations and extent of both internal and external insulation for duct systems are described in section entitled "Ductwork" and/or by the "Duct Type and Location Schedule" on the Drawings.

2. Internal Insulation: Ductwork which is required to be insulated internally (acoustically/thermally lined) shall be insulated as work of the section entitled "Ductwork".

3. External Insulation: Ductwork which is required to be insulated externally shall be insulated as work of this section.

4. Factory Insulation: Ductwork which is factory manufactured with internal or external insulation is not to be additionally insulated as work of this section unless specifically stated. Such factory insulated ductwork generally consists of flexible externally insulated ductwork and double walled acoustically thermally lined ductwork.

B. Interior, Concealed (e.g., ceiling plenums): Where external insulation is required, insulate externally with 2.2 inch thick fiberglass blanket wrap (Type DI-1). Adhere duct insulation using adhesive (Type A-F1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where duct width exceeds twenty-four inches (24"), the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners spaced one foot (1') on center. Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted, and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed using glass fabric and mastic applied in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations.



C. Interior, Exposed, (e.g., air handling unit rooms): Where external insulation is required, insulate with 1-inch thick semi-rigid fiberglass board (Type DI-2). Adhere to ductwork with adhesive (Type A-F1). Finish joints and seams with finish fabric (Type FF-GP1).

3.5 DUCT SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT

A. General: Insulate as follows unless detailed to a greater extent on the Drawings.

B. Fire damper and Fire/Smoke Damper External Surfaces:

1. Externally Insulated Duct Locations: Extend duct insulation up face of fire damper to damper sleeve. Seal insulation edges with 4-inch minimum width duct tape.

2. Internally Insulated Duct Locations: Provide additional external insulation from a point on the duct 12 inches from the fire damper to the fire damper and on the face of the fire damper to the fire damper sleeve. Seal insulation edges with 4-inch minimum width duct tape.

C. Air Distribution Devices: Insulate the backs of all ceiling diffusers and other air outlet devices installed in other than return air plenums as specified for interior concealed ducts.

3.6 COLD EQUIPMENT AND RELATED COMPONENTS

A. Pump Volutes for Chilled Water Systems: Provide sealed insulated removable housing around pump volute for access for routine maintenance. Housing shall be finished with aluminum jacketing.

B. Expansion Tanks(s), Air Separator(s) and Chemical Pot Type Feeder(s) for Chilled Water Systems: Insulate with elastomeric sheet insulation (Type 1-3). Secure the insulation with adhesive (Type A-E1) applied to a clean surface and finish with a layer of membrane (Type FF-GP1) applied between two glove coats of mastic (Type M-GP1). Insulation thickness shall be one and one-half (1-1/2) inch.

C. Condensate Drain Piping From Cooling Equipment:

1. Interior, and Exterior, Protected: Insulate with preformed elastomeric pipe insulation (Type PI-5) secured with adhesive (Type A-E1) and finished with white finish coating (FCC-E1). Thickness 3/4-inch. Provide 25/50 flame/smoke rating.

2. Exterior, Unprotected: None applicable.

D. Cold Surfaces at Chillers and Evaporators: Factory insulated. No insulation required as work of this section.

E. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Vibration Isolation: Insulate with elastomeric insulation (Type 1-3). Secure the insulation with adhesive (Type A-E1) applied to a clean surface and finish with white finish coating (FC-E1). Insulation thickness shall be one and one-half inches (1-1/2").



COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 23 08 00 - 1

SECTION 23 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.

C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.

C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.

F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.



1.05 CxA’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.

B. Direct commissioning testing.

C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.

D. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.

1.06 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:

1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, O&M manuals, and other documents and reports.

2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.

3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates.7. Corrective action documents.8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)


3.01 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.



D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.02 TEST AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.

2. The testing and balancing Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.

4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.

3.03 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.

B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from each air handling unit, chiller, pumps, and heat exchanger through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R Subcontractor, testing and balancing Contractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.



E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.04 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Heat Exchanger Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing shall be as required by manufacturer. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and heat exchanger certification to the CxA.

B. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Section 23 09 23 and on plans "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in 23 21 13 piping Sections. HVAC&R Subcontractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.3. Minimum flushing water velocity.4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

D. Energy Supply System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of water quality, ethylene glycol, volume solution %, and equipment at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

E. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, and other refrigeration



systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

F. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

G. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and sound control.


SOUTHPORT MIDDLE SCHOOL OCI Project No. 17118 Air Handling Unit Retrofit

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 23 - 1

SECTION 23 09 23 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Airflow stations 2. Flowmeters

B. Control Valves:

1. Control valves

C. Control Dampers:

1. Automated Dampers

1.3 PRODUCTS INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION

A. Communications with Third Party Equipment:

1. Any additional integral control systems included with the products integrated with the work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet or LonMark interface for integration into the Direct Digital Control System described in this section.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are part of this specification and shall be used in conjunction with this section as part of the contract documents.

1.5 CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The control system shall be of the electronic microprocessor type employing Direct Digital Control (DDC) Open Protocol technology (LonMark and/or BACnet) technology for all control sequences unless specifically stated otherwise in the Sequence of Operation portion of this specification.

B. All DDC controllers shall be connected via a communications bus to an operators panel. The operators panel may be located on the face of one of the DDC controllers, or at an alternate



location as approved by the Engineers. In addition, a portable operators panel may be connected to the system at any DDC controller location.

C. All DDC controllers shall be connected to a global information handler, which shall send and receive information of a global nature throughout the system. The information handler shall allow each DDC controller and operators panel access to all information contained within the system, regardless of location. The information handler shall also allow commands from any DDC controller or operators panel to be directed to any other DDC controller on either a global or individual basis. The information handler may be furnished as an integral part of one or more DDC controllers. This “Building Network Controller” shall be an Open protocol controller that will allow the simultaneous communication to BACnet and LonMark communication residing on the lower tier controllers (equipment controllers). The building controller shall be capable to be accessed using the majority of internet open protocols such as JAVA, XML, HTTP, etc.

D. Provisions shall be made to allow additional DDC controllers to be added at any point on the communications bus for future expansion.

E. Field Installed Devices (FID) shall be capable of stand-alone operation, as well as interfacing with the networked Building Control System. These controllers shall be LonMark and/or BACnet Protocols. No other protocols for this section will be acceptable.

F. Valve and damper operators shall be of the electronic type.

G. The Building Control System shall be made up of HVAC equipment with factory installed microprocessor-based Product Integrated Controls (PIC), distributed microprocessor-based Field Installed Devices (FID), input/output modules and necessary software.

H. The Product Integrated Controls (PIC) shall be factory installed controls capable of standalone operation. The controller shall be specifically designed to operate and monitor the functions of the HVAC equipment on which it is installed. The PIC shall be capable of interfacing onto the network.

I. The Building Network Controller shall incorporate the GUI (Graphical User Interface) via a standard web browser. Use of hardware keys or special licenses requirements to access the system with a browser is unacceptable. The Building controller will serve up the web pages on a standalone per building application for the intent that if the WAN is not working, an operator can access the system on site via the building internal network using an IP. A server computer will be located at the energy management office to supervise the remote panels and alarm if the communication is lost as well as any control function alarm. This server computer will also be the area of trending archives.


A. All equipment or piping used in the conditioned air stream, spaces or return air plenum shall comply with NFPA 90A Flame/Smoke/Fuel contribution rating of 25/50/0 and all applicable local building codes or requirements.

B. All wiring shall conform to the National Electric Code (NEC).

C. Installation of the building Automation System shall be by the manufacturer of the controls or their local authorized agent who has a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the respective field.



D. BACnet systems shall conform to ASHRAE 135; LonWorks systems shall conform to the standards and protocols of the LonMark Interoperability Association.

E. All electrical components 25 V and above shall be UL listed or labeled.

1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:

1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laborites (UL) 3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

1.8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Standards: System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections.

B. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems).

1. Graphic Display: A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within 10 sec.

2. Graphic Refresh: A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within 8 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.

3. Configuration and Tuning Screens: Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.

4. Object Command: Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec. Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.

5. Alarm Response Time: An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the workstation within 15 sec.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation: Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms within 5 sec of other workstations.

9. Reporting Accuracy: System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Table 1.

10. Control Stability and Accuracy: Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.



Table 1 Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Ducted Air ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Outside Air ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)

Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Water Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Delta-T ±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)

Relative Humidity ±5% RH

Water Flow ±2% of full scale

Airflow (terminal) ±5% of full scale (see Note 1)

Airflow (measuring stations) ±1% of full scale

Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)

Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)

Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor) ±1% of reading (see Note 3)

Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ±50 ppm

Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10% - 100% of scale Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters

Table 2 Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure ±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)

Airflow ±10% of full scale

Space Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)

Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Humidity ±5% RH

Fluid Pressure ±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) ±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.)

MPa (1-150 psi) 0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Submittal Requirements: Meet requirements of Division 01 on Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Provide six copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software, and equipment to be installed or furnished. Begin no work until submittals have been approved for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2010 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWF and PDF) and 3 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper. When manufacturer's cutsheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, clearly indicate applicable data by highlighting or by other means. Clearly reference covered specification and drawing on each submittal. General catalogs shall not be accepted as cutsheets to fulfill submittal



requirements. Select and show submittal quantities appropriate to scope of work. Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient quantities to complete work. Provide submittals within 12 weeks of contract award on the following:

1. Direct Digital Control System Hardware:

a. Complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and relevant technical data of equipment to be used.

b. Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves, product specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below and for relevant items not listed below:

i. Direct digital controllers (controller panels) ii. Transducers and transmitters iii. Sensors (include accuracy data) iv. Actuators v. Valves vi. Relays and switches vii. Control panels viii. Power supplies ix. Batteries x. Operator interface equipment xi. Wiring

c. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers. d. Floor plan schematic diagrams indicating field sensor and controller locations. e. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire

types.

2. Central System Hardware and Software:

a. Complete bill of material indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and relevant technical data of equipment used.

b. Manufacturer's description and technical data such as product specifications and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below and for relevant items furnished under this contract not listed below:

i. Central Processing Unit (CPU) or web server ii. Monitors iii. Keyboards iv. Power supplies v. Battery backups vi. Interface equipment between CPU or server and control panels vii. Operating System software viii. Operator interface software ix. Color graphic software x. Third-party software

c. Schematic diagrams of control, communication, and power wiring for central system installation. Show interface wiring to control system.

d. Network riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and control panels. e. Submit proposed graphics for each equipment type for approval. f. Submit proposed trend log format for approval. g. All details for software on how to add / remove / create & modify graphics /

configuring and reloading controls, etc.



3. Controlled Systems:

a. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire types.

b. Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point names. Graphically show locations of control elements.

c. Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system schematic, use the same name.

d. Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.

e. Complete description of control system operation including sequences of operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List I/O points and software points specified in Section 23 09 93. Indicate alarmed and trended points.

4. Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Section 23 09 23 Article 3.14 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance).

5. BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each submitted type of controller and operator interface.

B. Schedules:

1. Schedule of work provided within one month of contract award, indicating:

a. Intended sequence of work items b. Start date of each work item c. Duration of each work item d. Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead times e. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations

2. Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to expected delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.

C. Project Record Documents: Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of:

1. Project Record Drawings: As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as AutoCAD 2010 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWF and PDF) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper.

2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists: Completed versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Section 23 09 23 Article 3.14 (Control System Demonstration and Acceptance).

3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Printed, electronic, or online help documentation of the following:

a. As-built versions of submittal product data. b. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service

representatives for equipment and control systems. c. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on and off,

handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.

d. Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.



e. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.

f. Documentation of programs created using custom programming language including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies of programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.

g. Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media. h. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. i. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for

furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. j. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation or web server software, and graphics software.

k. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems. l. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

D. Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least six weeks before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions, computer-based training. Engineer will modify course outlines and materials if necessary to meet Owner's needs. Engineer will review and approve course outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.

E. After the system has operated properly for 90 days following start-up of the final component of the HVAC and DDC systems, an as-built copy of the software shall be transmitted to the Owner for permanent record purposes.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warrant work as follows:

1. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of 12 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service request.

2. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.

3. Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve Contractor-identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available, Owner can purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive upgrades for functional enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or upgrades without Owner's written authorization.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. The following is the approved control system supplier and any substitution must be approved by the Architect, Engineer and Owner prior to bidding. 1. Siemens

B. The BCS shall be furnished, installed, and programmed by the control manufacturer or local

authorized agent serving the St. Lucie County area. Control systems shall comply with the terms of this specification. 1. The Contractor shall use only operator workstation software, controller software, custom

application programming language, and controllers from the corresponding manufacturer and product line unless Owner approves use of multiple manufacturers.

2. Other products specified herein (such as sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the above manufacturers.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.

2.3 COMMUNICATION

A. Communication:

1. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a network.

2. Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable control network.

3. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.

2.4 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Operator Interface: Web server shall reside on high-speed network using Owner provided IP address with building controllers. Each standard browser connected to server shall be able to access all system information using user ID and password from any District computer.

B. Central Site: If the contractor does not already have a central server system in place, the contractor shall provide a central site system configuration that includes, as a minimum, the following components: Placement of computer/docking station to be determined by the Owner’s Facilities Management.

1. Central Server Components:



a. The central server shall consist of the following (minimum):

i. System shall utilize a server class PC, tower or rack mounted ii. Two Xeon 2.8GHz, 1MB L3 cache processors iii. 2GB, DDR266 SDRAM memory iv. DVD+R/W or CD ROM v. Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (IIS 6.0) Or Server 2008, IIS V7 + vi. Microsoft SQL Server 2005 vii. .NET Framework 1.1 BJE: .NET 3.5 viii. Furnish all required serial, parallel, and network communication ports, and all

cables for proper system operation. The server shall include a minimum 17", color monitor with 1024 x 768 screen resolution.

C. Hardware: Each workstation or web server shall consist of the following:

1. Hardware Base: Industry-standard hardware shall meet or exceed DDC system manufacturer's recommended specifications and shall meet response times specified in Section 23 09 23 Paragraph 1.8. Hard disk shall have sufficient memory to store system software, one year of data for trended points specified, and a system database at least twice the size of the existing database at system acceptance. Configure computers and network connections if multiple computers are required to meet specified memory and performance. Web server or workstations shall be Dell or equal PCs with a minimum of:

a. Intel i7 processor 3ghz b. 6 GB RAM c. 1 TB hard disk providing data at 100 MB/sec d. 24x CD-RW/DVD drive e. 24” LCD Monitor f. Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit Operating System g. Serial, parallel, and network communication ports and cables required for proper

system operation

D. Operator Functions: Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute the following functions as a minimum:

1. Log In and Log Out: System shall require user name and password to log in to operator interface.

2. Point-and-click Navigation: Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall allow operators to access graphics for equipment and geographic areas using point-and-click navigation.

3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties: Operators shall be able to view controlled equipment status and to adjust operating parameters such as setpoints, PID gains, on and off controls, and sensor calibration.

4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules: Operators shall be able to view scheduled operating hours of each schedulable piece of equipment on a weekly or monthly calendar-based graphical schedule display, to select and adjust each schedule and time period, and to simultaneously schedule related equipment. System shall clearly show exception schedules and holidays on the schedule display.

5. View and Respond to Alarms: Operators shall be able to view a list of currently active system alarms, to acknowledge each alarm, and to clear (delete) unneeded alarms.

6. View and Configure Trends: Operators shall be able to view a trend graph of each trended point and to edit graph configuration to display a specific time period or data range. Operator shall be able to create custom trend graphs to display on the same page data from multiple trended points.



7. View and Configure Reports: Operators shall be able to run preconfigured reports, to view report results, and to customize report configuration to show data of interest.

8. Manage Control System Hardware: Operators shall be able to view controller status, to restart (reboot) each controller, and to download new control software to each controller.

9. Manage Operator Access: Typically, only a few operators are authorized to manage operator access. Authorized operators shall be able to view a list of operators with system access and of functions they can perform while logged in. Operators shall be able to add operators, to delete operators, and to edit operator function authorization. Operator shall be able to authorize each operator function separately.

10. Create and modify control sequences. 11. Add or remove control points.

E. System Software:

1. Operating System: Web server shall have an industry-standard professional-grade operating system. Acceptable systems include Microsoft Windows.

2. Software shall be provided in these five categories:

a. System executive software b. Software for user control over system configuration through the main controller via

internet access (“Central site”), and by Maintenance Personnel in the field c. Facility monitoring functions d. Direct digital control e. Application software

3. Central site must be able to generate standard ASCII file formats to allow use with third-party software (e.g. Microsoft Excel) to generate and store owner-designed reports.

4. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. Programming, scheduling and set-point changes shall be accessible for modification on each menu for the associated equipment. Operator shall be able to automatically download changes from the central site to the appropriate program for the equipment being controlled. Operator shall be able to upload information from the field modules to the central site.

5. All operator commands shall be in graphics data base and menu driven. After the operator selects the desired object item or menu, the system shall display either the status of selected object item or the allowable options available. Upon entry of a command to the point or points desired as described above, the system shall, before performing any command requested and any entered data, ask the operator to verify his intent (e.g. “are you sure?”). System shall include error monitoring software for user's input error.

6. Output Format:

a. The system shall operate on a System Format basis, regardless of the manner or hardware configuration in which the data is acquired. A "system" shall consist of a logical grouping of data points, related to a piece of mechanical equipment, an energy distribution system, or an architectural area. For example, in some cases, it may be desired to display, as a single system, a space temperature with its associated air handling unit, and in other cases to display all space temperatures on a floor or in a building. The DDC shall allow such determinations to be made without regard to the physical hardware locations of a point or group of points. Likewise, the system shall accommodate future changes of system grouping and operations without field hardware changes.



b. All displays and logs shall contain a header line indicating date, day-of-week, and time.

c. All output displays or logs of a point or group of points shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:

i. Graphic presentation of the System ii. User name of point iii. Point descriptor iv. Current value/status v. Associated engineering units vi. Alarm description

d. User names, point descriptors, and engineering units shall be operator definable on a per point basis.

e. Set points:

i. All alarm colors shall be in red. ii. System shall be capable of utilizing the operator interface to change individual

zone temperature setpoints. iii. System shall be capable of globally changing all or groups of set points.

f. Graphic Structure:

i. Software graphics will ensure the operator is always aware of his position within the system as well as how to logically progress through the graphical hierarchy to select any desired graphic or other source of information.

ii. System shall be programmed to provide a color graphic for:

a) Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled b) Each floor and zone controlled - both HVAC and lighting. c) Each trend d) Each report

g. User Access Restriction. Operator sign-on shall require an assignable password. Access security shall have multiple levels, starting at ‘view only’ to full access, including ability to program. Designer shall coordinate with Owner’s representative for access to be included at each level. A typical progression would include: readout only, local room set point; local schedule; system set points; system schedules; building set points, schedules, and sequences; campus set points, schedules, and sequences; district set points, schedules, and sequences.

h. Power Failure/Automatic Restart:

i. Power failures shall cause the system to go into an orderly shutdown with no loss of program memory.

ii. Upon resumption of power, the system shall automatically restart and record the times and dates of the power failure and restoration at the Central Site.

iii. “Restart” program shall automatically restart affected field equipment. Operator shall be able to define an automatic power up time delay for each piece of equipment under control.

7. User Control Over System Configuration:

a. Database Creation and Modification. All changes shall be done utilizing standard procedures and be capable of being done while the system is on-line and operational. The system shall allow changes to be made through the portable



operator terminal and from the central site. To aid the user, instructive prompting software shall be provided.

b. System shall permit the operator, with proper password, to perform as a minimum the following:

i. Add and delete points ii. Modify point parameters iii. Create and modify control sequences iv. Reconfigure application programs v. Add and/or modify graphics

c. All data points within the database shall be completely accessible as independent or dependent variables for custom programming, calculation, interlocking, or manipulation.

d. Graphics software shall be fully implemented and operational to accomplish the following:

i. Create a new graphic picture ii. Modify a portion of a graphic picture iii. Delete a graphic picture, or any portion thereof iv. Call up a graphic picture v. Cancel the display of a graphic picture vi. Assign conditions which automatically initiate the display vii. Overlay alphanumeric and graphics viii. Save the graphic picture ix. Display latest process data fully integrated with the graphic display

8. Facility Management Functions:

a. Trend Logging:

i. System shall be able to trend and display either numerically or graphically any analog or digital points in the system.

ii. System shall be able to simultaneously, graphically display any two trended points within a module function block or any point in the module with respect to the outside air temperature, enthalpy, or relative humidity.

iii. Each field module shall be capable of storing the most recent 60 samples for each single trend point or the most recent 30 samples for each of two trended points from one module function block.

iv. Each module shall be capable of automatically uploading on a daily basis all accumulated trend data to the central site for permanent storage on non-volatile memory.

b. Run Time:

i. System shall provide run time information for all digital output and input points on command from the operator. Maximum run time limits shall be operator definable and shall be capable of automatically issuing an alert when the run time maximum is exceeded. Operator shall be able to reset the run time accumulator.

ii. Run time hours and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory.

iii. Each module shall be capable of automatically uploading all accumulated data to the central site for permanent storage on non-volatile memory.



c. Alarm Conditions and Maintenance Messages:

i. Central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management. i.e., Incoming alarms shall be displayed, and generate an audible alarm when deemed appropriate by the operator, while the operator is using other functions of the system. The operator shall be able to return to his prior operation after the alarm is received and acknowledged.

ii. System shall distinguish between alarms and messages with alarms having a higher priority.

iii. System shall be capable of delivering an alarm or message directly to up to three different remote locations, in addition to the central site, through E-Mail, E-Page, alphanumeric page, or other appropriate method. Operator shall determine if alarms or messages are to be based on temperature limit, status, off-normal reporting, or other condition. Coordinate with Owner to determine what alarm condition(s) merit direct delivery of alarm messages. Typically, any condition, or set of conditions, that would cause the plant to shut down or have the potential to damage equipment or injure personnel would merit such direct reporting.

iv. System shall be capable of generating maintenance messages when run time accumulation maximum limits are exceeded.

v. Text for operator alarm and messages shall be operator definable. System shall be capable of storing at least 100 messages each of any length. Generic messages used for multiple points throughout the system shall only count as one message. In the event the central site is powered down, alarms shall be stored in the modules until the central site is restored.

vi. Central site shall be capable of transferring all alarms to non-volatile memory for storage.

d. Reports and Archiving:

i. Field modules shall be capable of calling the central site to automatically upload all current and accumulated data. This shall be delivered to the central site for permanent storage on non-volatile memory. All reports and stored data shall be transferable to other sites or media.

ii. System shall be capable of reporting and archiving the following information as a minimum:

a) Outside air temperature history and degree day history b) Electric demand and usage history c) All trended points d) All alarms and messages e) Equipment runtime information

iii. The system shall also provide the following additional reports for which archiving is not applicable:

a) All points summary b) Building operating schedules c) Printout of any graphic screen

iv. All systems reports shall be capable to being viewed via the central site and printed at the operator's discretion



9. Direct Digital Control Software:

a. System shall continuously perform DDC functions at the local DDC controller in a stand-alone mode. The operator shall be able to design and modify the control loops to meet the requirements of the system being operated. Operators shall use system provided displays for tuning of PID loops. These displays shall include the past three input variable values, the set point for the loop as well as the sample interval and the results of the proportional, integral and derivative effects of the final output.

b. Each Controller shall perform the following functions:

i. Identify and report alarm conditions ii. Execute DDC algorithms iii. Execute all application programs indicated on the I/O Summary table iv. Trend and store data

c. In the event of a Controller failure, all points under its control shall be commanded to the failure mode.

d. All DDC software shall reside in the respective DDC controller.

10. Application Software:

a. Application software shall be as required to produce and implement the sequences of operation.

F. Portable Operator's Terminal: Provide all necessary software to configure a Dell or equal laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator's Terminal. Operator shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or directly to each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.

1. Minimum Requirements:

a. Dell XT Tablet PC b. 12.1” Touch screen c. 2 GB RAM d. 64GB SSD Harddrive e. Intel WiFi Link 5300 (802.11a/g/n 3x3) f. Bluetooth Module g. 6-cell 42W/Hr Li-ion primary battery h. Spare 6-cell battery i. Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit operating system

2.5 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

A. Building and energy management application software shall reside and operate in system controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser interface, or engineering workstation.

B. Scheduling: See Paragraph 2.4.C.4 (View and Adjust Operating Schedules). System shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum:

1. Weekly: Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).



2. Exception: Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week.

3. Holiday: Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.

C. System Coordination: Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on function and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.

D. Remote Communication: System shall automatically contact operator workstation or server on receipt of critical alarms. If no network connection is available, system shall use a modem connection.

E. Maintenance Management: System shall generate maintenance alarms when equipment exceeds adjustable runtime, equipment starts, or performance limits. Configure and enable maintenance alarms as recommended by manufacturer for following equipment:

1. Chillers

F. Sequencing: Application software shall sequence chillers and pumps as specified in control sequences.

G. PID Control: System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.

H. Staggered Start: System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage. Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between equipment restarts.

I. Energy Calculations:

1. System shall accumulate and convert instantaneous power (kW) or flow rates (L/s [gpm]) to energy usage data.

2. System shall calculate a sliding-window average (rolling average). Operator shall be able to adjust window interval to 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 60 minutes.

3. System shall communicate with all electrical sub metering equipment and gather data on the sub system electrical consumption characteristics (i.e. lighting, mechanical equipment, etc.).

J. Anti-Short Cycling: Binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of adjustable minimum on-time and off-time settings.

K. On and Off Control with Differential: System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting on and off algorithms with adjustable differential to cycle a binary output based on a controlled variable and setpoint.

L. Runtime Totalization: System shall provide an algorithm that can totalize runtime for each binary input and output. Operator shall be able to enable runtime alarm based on exceeded adjustable runtime limit. Configure and enable runtime totalization and alarms as specified in Sequence of Operation.



M. Software required to provide the initial operation routines shall not consume more than 70% of programmable capability of the controller.

2.6 CONTROLLERS

A. General: Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS) as required to achieve performance specified in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.8 (System Performance). Every device in the system which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC equipment must conform to a standard BACnet or LonMark Device profile.

B. The main, or central, controller shall have non-volatile memory for all system sequences, setpoints, trended data, etc., for proper system operation, to support restart upon power loss, and to prevent loss of historical data. The main, or central, controller shall have a human interface device mounted on the front surface of its panel for data read-out and control input.

C. Communication:

1. Service Port: Each controller shall provide a service communication port for connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection shall be extended to space temperature sensor ports where shown on drawings.

2. Signal Management: BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.

3. Data Sharing: Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with each networked BC and AAC.

4. Stand-Alone Operation: Each piece of equipment specified shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network. At a minimum, provide control for each:

a. AHU. b. FCU. c. VAV.

D. Environment: Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).

2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

E. Real-Time Clock: Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.

F. Serviceability:

1. Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. 2. Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination

card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and

shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.



G. Memory:

1. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming requirements.

2. Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72 hours in the event of power loss.

3. Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application programming in the event of power loss. System shall automatically download dynamic control parameters following power loss.

H. Immunity to Power and Noise: Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

I. Transformer: ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.

J. All control panels shall have wiring diagrams for the devices contained within. Wiring within the panel should be labeled for the device to which it goes from the controller (valve, damper, etc.).

2.7 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. General: Hard-wire input and output points to BCs, AACs, ASCs, or SAs.

B. Protection: Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with up to 24 V for any duration shall cause no controller damage.

C. Binary Inputs: Binary inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote device. Binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall be protected against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry contact closure without application of power external to the controller.

D. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input requirements and shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.

E. Analog Inputs: Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.

F. Binary Outputs: Binary outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off control. Building Controller binary outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

G. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal as required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output shall have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer, and status lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.

H. Tri-State Outputs: Control three-point floating electronic actuators without feedback with tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs may be used to provide



analog output control in zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, and zone dampers.

I. Universal Inputs and Outputs: Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either binary or analog in software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are appropriate for their designated use.

2.8 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

A. Power Supplies: Control transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish over-current protection in primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service in accordance with NEC requirements. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.

1. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit shall be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak. Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.

a. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.

b. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.

B. Power Line Filtering:

1. Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations and controllers. Surge protection shall have:

a. Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz

2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. Motorized Control Dampers:

1. Type: Control dampers shall have linear flow characteristics and shall be parallel- or opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on drawings.

a. Outdoor and return air mixing dampers and face-and-bypass dampers shall be parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward each other.

b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade. c. Two-position shutoff dampers shall be parallel- or opposed-blade with blade and side

seals.

2. Frame: Damper frames shall be 2.38 mm (13 gauge) galvanized steel channel or 3.175 mm (1/8 in.) extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.

3. Blades: Damper blades shall not exceed 20 cm (8 in.) in width or 125 cm (48 in.) in length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity (10 m/s [2000 fpm]) performance. Blades shall be not less than 1.5875 mm (16 gauge).



4. Shaft Bearings: Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better.

5. Seals: Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of butyl rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. Blade seals shall leak no more than 50 L/s·m2 (10 cfm per ft2) at 1000 Pa (4 in. w.g.) differential pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-open face velocity of 7.5 m/s (1500 fpm).

6. Acceptable manufacturer is Ruskin CD – 50, or approved equal.

B. Electric Damper and Valve Actuators:

1. Stall Protection: Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage throughout the actuator's rotation.

2. Spring-return Mechanism: Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

3. Signal and Range: Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20 mA control signal and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range.

4. Wiring: 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring. 5. Manual Positioning: Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the

actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N·m (60 in.-lb) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.

6. All actuators are to provide position feedback to system. 7. Acceptable manufactures Belimo, or approved equal.

C. Control Valves:

1. General: Select body and trim materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for design conditions and service shown.

2. Type: Provide two- or three-way control valves for two-position or modulating service as shown.

3. Water Valves:

a. Valves providing two-position service shall be quick opening. Two-way valves shall have replaceable disc or ball.

b. Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings.

i. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head. ii. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or

100% of total system (pump) head.

c. Ports: Valves providing modulating service shall be pressure independent characterized control.

d. Sizing:

i. Two-position service: line size. ii. Two-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the greatest of twice

the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 35 kPa (5 psi).

iii. Three-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the smaller of twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load) or 35 kPa (5 psi).

e. Fail Position: Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows unless otherwise specified.



i. Water zone valves: normally open. ii. Heating coils in air handlers: normally open. iii. Chilled water control valves: normally closed. iv. Other applications: as scheduled or as required by sequences of operation.

4. Acceptable manufactures Belimo Energy Valve.

D. Butterfly Valves – High Performance:

1. Valve body shall be full lugged carbon steel ANSI Class 150 [300] body with a 316 stainless steel disc without a nylon coating, RTFE seat, and be ANSI Class 150300 flange standards. Blowout-proof shaft shall be 17-4ph stainless steel and shall be supported at four locations by glass-backed TFE bushings. Valve packing shall be Chevron TFE and shall include fully adjustable packing flange and separable packing gland. Valve body shall have long stem design to allow for 2” insulation (minimum). Valve face-to-face dimensions shall comply with API 609 and MSS-SP-68. Valve assembly shall be completely assembled and tested, ready for installation

2. Industrial Actuators (ONLY TO BE USED WITH 2.16.I Butterfly Valves) 3. Manufactured, brand labeled or distributed by BELIMO 4. The combination of valve and actuator shall meet the close-off requirements as specified 5. Coupling: ISO 5211 mounting standards 6. Overload Protection: A self resetting thermal switch embedded in the motor 7. Manual Override: Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel or shaft for manual

override to permit operation of the actuator in the event of an electrical power failure 8. Power Requirements: 24VAC control power. 9. Auxiliary Switches: 2 SPDT rated 3A at 250 VAC 10. Temperature Rating: -22 to +150ºF -30 to +65ºC. 11. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA type 4X/ IP67 with an industrial quality coating.

Actuator shall have an internal heater to prevent condensation within the housing. A visual indication beacon shall indicate position status of the device

12. Agency Listing: ISO, CE, CSA 13. The manufacturer shall warrant for 2 years from the date of production

E. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats: Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

1. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats: Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.

2. Low-Limit Thermostats: Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.

F. Temperature Sensors:

1. Type: Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or thermistor.

2. Duct Sensors: Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m 2(10 ft 2) of duct cross-section.



3. Immersion Sensors: Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well. Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.

4. Space Sensors:

a. Space sensors shall have no display. b. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment, override switch and

communication port.

5. Differential Sensors: Provide matched sensors for differential temperature measurement.

G. Humidity Sensors:

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%. 2. Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber. 3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and shall be

suitable for ambient conditions of 40°C-75°C (40°F-170°F). 4. Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually. 5. Room Humidity sensors shall be integral to the room temperature sensor so that there is

only one sensor per room.

H. Air Flow Monitor Stations:

1. Furnish and coordinate the installation of Air Flow Measuring Stations according to the Contract Documents.

2. Include manufacturer’s recommended number of probes for the proper traverse of the air duct, and required mounting hardware.

3. Provide all cabling required for connection to probe assemblies and transmitter electronics.

4. Where these stations serve as primary signals for airflow control loops, verify location and installation to assure that accurate primary signals are obtained.

5. Acceptable manufacturer is Ebtron (Gold Series).

I. Flow Switches: Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential pressure type (air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).

1. Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

2. Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

J. Relays:

1. Control Relays: Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application.

2. Time Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.



K. Override Timers:

1. Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application. Provide 0-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.

L. Current Transmitters:

1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized.

3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.

M. Current Transformers:

1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.

2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.

3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for existing wiring installation.

N. Voltage Transmitters:

1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA output with zero and span adjustment.

2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac, and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.

3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.

O. Voltage Transformers:

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have built-in fuse protection.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C-55°C (40°F-130°F) and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

P. Power Monitors:

1. Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase disconnect and shorting switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and UL listed split-core current transformers.

2. Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or 4-20 mA for kW reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs and maximum error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.



Q. Current Switches:

1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output requirements.

R. Pressure Transducers:

1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span. 2. Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than

calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements. 3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof

pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.

4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.) Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.

S. Differential Pressure Switches: Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.

T. Flow Meter / BTU Meter:

1. Provide insertion electromagnetic type flow meters.

a. Minimum pressure: 150 psig b. Minimum temperature rating: 250 deg F c. Stainless steel probe of length to span inside of pipe. d. Equal to Onicon F-3500

U. BTU Meter:

1. Where BTU meters are called out, provide companion BTU meter system along with flow meter equal to Onicon F-3500 flow meter with System 10 BTU meter or approved equal.

a. Temp reading accuracy: +/- 15 deg F over calibrated range. b. Temp reading range: 32 deg F to 200 deg F.

V. Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches: PE switches shall be UL listed, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) or motor control rated, metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated for 0-175 kPa (0-25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum setpoint range of 14-125 kPa (2-18 psig).

1. Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as required by application.

2. Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted). Exception: Switches shall be enclosed type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise specified.

3. Each pneumatic signal line to PE switches shall have permanent indicating gauge.



W. Local Control Panels:

1. Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged door key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each control panel and sub-panel.

2. Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded stranded conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field connection terminals shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified per control and interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.

3. Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with overcurrent protection.

2.10 WIRING AND RACEWAYS

A. General: Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable sections of Division 26.

B. Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for 90°C (200°F) minimum service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Architect or Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work.

B. Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work.

C. Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom or space conditions or other discrepancies to Engineer and obtain written instructions for changes necessary to accommodate Section 23 09 23 work with work of others. Controls Contractor shall perform at his expense necessary changes in specified work caused by failure or neglect to report discrepancies.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to material caused by Contractor's work or employees.

B. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.3 COORDINATION

A. Site:



1. Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade where work will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If installation without coordination causes interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall correct conditions without extra charge.

2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.

B. Submittals: See Section 23 09 23 Article 1.9 (Submittals).

C. Test and Balance:

1. Provide Test and Balance Contractor a single set of necessary tools to interface to control system for testing and balancing.

2. Train Test and Balance Contractor to use control system interface tools. 3. Provide a qualified technician to assist with testing and balancing the first 20 terminal

units. 4. Test and Balance Contractor shall return tools undamaged and in working condition at

completion of testing and balancing.

D. Life Safety:

1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are provided under Division 28. Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as specified in Sequence of Operation.

E. Coordination with Other Controls: Integrate with and coordinate controls and control devices furnished or installed by others as follows.

1. Communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified in Section 23 09 23 Article 2.3 (Communication).

2. Each supplier of a controls product shall configure, program, start up, and test that product to meet the sequences of operation regardless of where within the contract documents those products are described.

3. Coordinate and resolve incompatibility issues that arise between control products provided under this section and those provided under other sections or divisions of this specification.

4. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for integration of control products provided by multiple suppliers regardless of where integration is described within the contract documents.

3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to walls wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibration isolation.

C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code (NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.

D. Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.



E. Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.7 (Codes and Standards).

B. Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.

C. Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.6 WIRING

A. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes, Division 26, and manufacturer's recommendations. Where the requirements of Section 23 09 23 differ from Division 26, Section 23 09 23 shall take precedence.

B. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL listed in approved raceway as specified by NEC and Division 26.

C. Low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power circuits as required to meet Class 2 current limit.

D. NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations such as return air plenums shall be UL listed for the intended application.

E. Install wiring in raceway where subject to mechanical damage and at levels below 3 m (10ft) in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms.

F. Install Class 1 and Class 2 wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment shall not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two through relays and transformers.

G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

H. Run exposed Class 2 wiring parallel to a surface or perpendicular to it and tie neatly at 3 m (10 ft) intervals.

I. Use structural members to support or anchor plenum cables without raceway. Do not use ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems to support or anchor cables.

J. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.

K. Size raceway and select wire size and type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC requirements.



L. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.

M. Use color-coded conductors throughout.

N. Locate control and status relays in designated enclosures only. Do not install control and status relays in packaged equipment control panel enclosures containing Class 1 starters.

O. Conceal raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Maintain minimum clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as steam pipes or flues.

P. Adhere to requirements in Division 26 where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

Q. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and enclosure openings. Seal top ends of vertical raceways.

R. Terminate control and interlock wiring related to the work of this section. Maintain at the job site updated (as-built) wiring diagrams that identify terminations.

S. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft) in length and shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than ½ in. electrical trade size. Use liquid-tight flexible metal raceways in areas exposed to moisture including chiller and boiler rooms.

T. Install raceway rigidly, support adequately, ream at both ends, and leave clean and free of obstructions. Join raceway sections with couplings and according to code. Make terminations in boxes with fittings. Make terminations not in boxes with bushings.

3.7 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Communication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article 3.6 (Wiring).

B. Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other Class 2 wiring.

C. During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified by the cable manufacturer.

D. Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each cable.

E. Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable and ground where a cable enters or exits a building.

F. Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.

G. Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.

H. Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding."



3.8 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. During installation do not exceed maximum pulling tensions specified by cable manufacturer. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacturer's specifications.

B. Install cabling and associated components according to manufacturers' instructions. Do not exceed minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii specified by cable manufacturer.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.

C. Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.

D. Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor readings from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.

E. Use averaging sensors in mixing plenums and hot and cold decks. Install averaging sensors in a serpentine manner vertically across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip.

F. Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m2 (1 ft2) of coil area.

G. Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

H. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall at designated location with sun shield.

I. Differential Air Static Pressure:

1. Supply Duct Static Pressure: Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Return Duct Static Pressure: Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pitot tube. Make pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Building Static Pressure: Pipe pressure sensor's low-pressure port to the static pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume accumulator. Pipe high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.

4. Piping to pressure transducer pressure ports shall contain a capped test port adjacent to transducer.

5. Pressure transducers, except those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in control panels, not on monitored equipment or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a vibration-free location accessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.

6. Mount gauge tees adjacent to air and water differential pressure taps. Install shut-off valves before tee for water gauges.

J. Smoke detectors, freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to monitor safety switch status.



3.10 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B. Adjust flow switch according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.11 ACTUATORS

A. General: Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Electric and Electronic Damper Actuators: Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer's recommendations.

1. For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum 5° travel available for damper seal tightening.

2. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, then tighten linkage.

3. Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.

4. Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.

C. Valve Actuators: Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by actuator manufacturer.

3.12 PROGRAMMING

A. Point Naming: Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each sequence of operation. Where multiple points with the same name reside in the same controller, each point name may be customized with its associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone Temp 2" for Zone 2.

B. Software Programming: Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation. Graphic- or parameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs shall be modular, structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the program.

1. Application Programming: Provide application programming that adheres to sequences of operation specified. Program documentation or comment statements shall reflect language used in sequences of operation.

2. System Programming: Provide system programming necessary for system operation.

C. Operator Interface:

1. Standard Graphics: Provide graphics as specified. Show on each equipment graphic input and output points and relevant calculated points such as indicated on the applicable Points List in and sequences shown on the plans. Point information on graphics shall dynamically update.

2. Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and functions (including operating system software, operator interface database, and third-party software installation and integration required for successful operator interface operation).



3.13 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

A. Startup Testing: Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before notifying Owner of system demonstration. Provide Owner with schedule for startup testing. Owner may have representative present during any or all startup testing.

1. Calibrate and prepare for service each instrument, control, and accessory equipment furnished under Section 23 09 23.

2. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.

3. Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each device according to manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are correct.

5. Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.

6. Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.

7. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and observe each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune PID loops and each control routine that requires tuning.

8. Alarms and Interlocks:

a. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm. b. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in

the proper direction. c. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of

variable and interlock action.

3.14 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Demonstration: Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to demonstrate system operation and compliance with specification after and in addition to tests specified in Article 3.13 (Control System Checkout and Testing). Provide Engineer with log documenting completion of startup tests.

1. Owner/Engineer may be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify Owner/Engineer at least 10 days before system demonstration begins.

2. Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved under Section 23 09 23 Article 1.9 (Submittals). Complete approved checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.

3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified in Section 23 09 93. Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication. Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested by Engineer. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system operation.

4. Demonstrate compliance with Section 23 09 23 Part 1 (System Performance). 5. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode. 6. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.



7. Demonstrate each of the following:

a. DDC loop response: Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC loop's response to a setpoint change representing an actuator position change of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show setpoint, actuator position, and controlled variable values. Engineer will require further tuning of each loop that displays unreasonably under- or over-damped control.

b. Demand limiting: Supply trend data output showing demand-limiting algorithm action. Trend data shall document action sampled each minute over at least a 30-minute period and shall show building kW, demand-limiting setpoint, and status of setpoints and other affected equipment parameters.

c. Building fire alarm system interface. d. Trend logs for each system: Trend data shall indicate setpoints, operating points,

valve positions, and other data as specified in the points list provided with each sequence of operation. Each log shall cover three 48-hour periods and shall have a sample frequency not less than 10 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for use in other software programs as specified in.

e. Minimum Trend Log Requirements:

i. Control Stability Trend Logs:

a) Each digital or analog output to valves, dampers, adjustable frequency drives and other control devices shall be included.

b) Scan time shall be at five second intervals for a duration of ten minutes. c) Start of the sets shall be immediately after change from one mode to

another, i.e., unoccupied to occupied, no economizer to economizer, off to on, etc. Only one log will be required for each output as long as it addresses all controlled elements.

d) Where control of a piece of equipment is by factory furnished packaged controls, then the controlled temperature which is monitored shall be included. For instance, where a chiller is controlled by its own control system and control is from leaving chilled water temperature, then leaving chilled water temperature shall be included in the log set.

ii. System Operation Trend Logs:

a) Each measured value (temperature, pressure, amps, etc.), equipment status (on-off, percent speed or position, etc.), each mode (unoccupied, cool-down, occupied, etc.), each setpoint and each alarm shall be included.

b) Scan time shall be at operation adjustable intervals with a duration of 24 hours.

c) Sets shall be included for cooling only, cooling plus economizer and heating only. Where start up occurs at a defined season and both heating and cooling cannot be logged, then the system will be accepted subject to a final demonstration of the other season, when weather permits.

iii. Load Profile Trend Log Sets:

a) The total campus load in tons shall be calculated using flow and temperature difference between supply and return water.

b) Chiller plant load shall be calculated using chiller flow and temperature difference between supply and return water.



c) Heat rejection load on water cooled equipment shall be calculated based on condenser water flow and temperature difference between supply and return water.

d) Compressor power input (KWH) shall be calculated based on measured KW or volts and amps and a look-up table provided by the compressor supplier. This shall be logged and converted to tons (KW x 3414 divided by 12,000) and compared to the compressor tons obtained by subtracting chiller tons from condenser tons.

e) Tonnage shall be calculated by averaging six instantaneous readings per hour taken at ten minute intervals. Tonnage for each of the 24 hours shall be listed.

iv. Energy Use Trend Log Sets:

a) Energy use (KWH) of each chiller compressor shall be calculated using KWH or measured volts, amps and a look-up table provided by the manufacturer.

b) Energy use of each dedicated primary chilled water pump, condenser water pump and cooling tower fan shall be calculated using measured KWH or volts and amps prorated to motor nameplate data to convert to KW. Chiller auxiliary power use (KWH) shall be added to the chiller power use to get each individual chiller system power use.

c) Energy use of the secondary chilled water distribution pumps shall be obtained in a similar manner and added to the chiller system energy use to get central plant total energy use. This shall be compared to the measured central plant KWH where available.

d) Energy use of each fan shall be calculated using measured amps and a look-up table provided by the motor manufacturer to convert to KW.

e) Energy use of constant flow exhaust fans, small pumps, etc. shall be estimated based on input data of KW taken from the test and balance data and added based on fan on or off status.

f) The sum of all HVAC power use shall be totaled and listed. g) KWH shall be calculated by averaging six instantaneous KW readings per

hour taken at the same ten-minute intervals as the load measurements. Each chiller, central plant and total building energy use shall be converted to KW/ton and listed.

h) Energy consumption of the entire building shall be taken from the power company meters and listed.

i) Outdoor air wetbulb shall be listed. j) Data shall be presented for each of the 24 hours each day. k) Energy use shall be presented in bar graph form.

v. Custom Trend Log Sets:

a) The operator shall have the ability to customize all trend logs by adjusting both sampling time and duration.

b) After the initial graph data is accepted, the print-out shall be changed from a fixed interval to a change of value.

8. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete each test.



B. Acceptance:

1. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both Engineer and Owner, Engineer will accept control system as meeting completion requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control.

2. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are submitted and approved as required in Section 23 09 23 Article 1.9 (Submittals).

3. After start-up and calibration, Building Controls Contractor shall submit to the Engineer trend logs of all points on each system demonstrating stable and proper operation. The trend logs shall be as follows:

a. 24 hour period at 15 minute intervals. b. 3 hour start-up period at 5 minute intervals. c. A total of two sets covering two days during each period are required.

3.15 TRAINING

A. Provide training for a designated staff of Owner's representatives. Training shall be provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom training, or a combination of training methods.

B. Provide as part of this contract on site training for four facility operators (two advanced and two basic level) as designated by the Owner.

C. A total of 40 hours of on the job owner training conducted by a technician or technicians fully qualified to conduct such training shall be provided. Instruction or Training shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Instructions in the manufacturers recommended maintenance and operating procedures. 2. Instructions in the detailed sequence of operation of the mechanical equipment controls. 3. Instructions in reading and using the control wiring diagrams. 4. Instructions in control setpoint adjustment as relating to each specific system provided

under this section. 5. Performance testing as described in Part 3.



VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 09 25 - 1

SECTION 23 09 25 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency motor Drive (VFD) consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use on a standard NEMA Design B induction motor.

B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary controls as herein specified. The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum of twenty years. All VFDs installed on this project shall be from the same manufacturer.


A. Referenced Standards:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

a) Standard 519-1992, IEEE Guide for Harmonic Content and Control.

2. Underwriters laboratories

a) UL508C

3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

a) ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives

4. IEC 16800 Parts 1 and 2

B. Qualifications:

1. VFDs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFDs that require the customer to supply external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not acceptable. VFDs with requiring additional branch circuit protection are not acceptable. The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need for input fusing.

2. CE Mark – The VFD shall conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic Compatibility directive, a requirement for CE marking. The VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level.

3. Acceptable Manufactures:

a) ABB ACH550 Series.b) Danfoss/Grahamc) Square Dd) Yaskawae) Alternate manufacturer’s requests must be submitted in writing at least 10 working

days prior to bid. Approval does not relieve supplier of specification requirements. f) VFDs that are manufactured by a third party and “brand labeled” shall not be

acceptable.



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include the following information:

1. Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weight.2. Customer connection and power wiring diagrams.3. Complete technical product description include a complete list of options provided. Any

portions of the specifications not complied with must be clearly indicated or the supplier and contractor shall be liable to provide all components required to meet the specification.

4. Compliance to IEEE 519 – harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion (TDD).

a) The VFD manufacturer shall provide calculations; specific to the installation, showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 5%. Input filters shall be sized and provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with the IEEE electrical system standard 519. All VFDs shall include a minimum of 5% equivalent impedance reactors, no exceptions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type enclosure, (NEMA rated enclosures are not acceptable) completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -35% nominal voltage as a minimum.

1. Environmental operating conditions: 0 – 400 C continuous. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, up to 95% humidity, non-condensing. All circuit boards shall have conformal coating.

2. Enclosure shall be rated UL type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD.

B. All VFDs shall have the following features:

1. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs.

2. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting.

3. There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery back up with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings. Capacitor backup is not acceptable.

4. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start).



5. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430-150 for 4-pole motors.

6. The VFD shall have 5% equivalent impedance internal reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% equivalent impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. VFDs with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.

7. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated MOV’s (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% equivalent impedance internal reactors.

8. The VFD shall provide a programmable proof of flow Form-C relay output (broken belt / broken coupling). The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. Relay outputs shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false underload condition.

D. All VFDs to have the following adjustments:

1. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.

2. Two (2) PID Setpoint controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. There shall be two parameter sets for the first PID that allow the sets to be switched via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad for night setback, summer/winter setpoints, etc. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain setpoint of an independent process (ie. valves, dampers, etc.). All setpoints, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial communication network.

3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals. 4. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be

programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, and other data.

5. Six (6) programmable digital inputs.6. Three (3) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include

programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable.

7. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock control, or serial communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close.

8. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 – 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps.

9. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise.



10. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency without derating the VFD or operating at high carrier frequency only at low speeds.

11. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes.

E. The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (LED and alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words.

F. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable):

Output FrequencyMotor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)Motor CurrentDrive TemperatureDC Bus VoltageOutput Voltage

G. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the fireman’s control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed or operate in a specific fireman’s override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback . The mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run interlock, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. “Override Mode” shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall resume normal operation.

H. Serial Communications:

1. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, BACnet, Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building Technologies FLN. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.

2. The BACnet connection shall be an RS485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to:

a. Data Sharing – Read Property – B.b. Data Sharing – Write Property – B.c. Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-AM).d. Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have).e. Device Management – Communication Control – B.

3. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt



hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.

I. EMI / RFI filters. All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The VFD shall comply with standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment, restricted level with up to 100’ of motor cables. No Exceptions. Certified test lab test reports shall be provided with the submittals.

J. All VFDs through 60HP shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring. The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. The VFD shall not be damaged by this condition.

K. OPTIONAL FEATURES – Optional features to be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be interlocked such that input power is turned off before either enclosure can be opened. The VFD and Bypass as a package shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 100,000 amps and shall be indicated on the data label.

1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor, service (isolation) switch and VFD input fuses are required. Bypass designs, which have no VFD only fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted

2. Door interlocked padlockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options.

L. The following operators shall be provided:

a. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto b. Drive mode selector and lightc. Bypass mode selector and lightd. Bypass fault reset e. Bypass LDC display, 2 lines, for programming and status / fault / warning

indications

1. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - The Bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in Bypass mode are not acceptable.

2. The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to operate from a line of +30%, -35% nominal voltage as a minimum. The system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain “sealed in” over this voltage tolerance at a minimum.

3. The Bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the enclosure for repair / replacement.

4. Serial communications – the bypass and VFD shall be capable of being monitored and or controlled via serial communications. Provide communications protocols for ModBus; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building Technologies FLN (P1) and BACnet in the bypass controller.

5. BACnet Serial communication bypass capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run-stop control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor



feedback such as, bypass current (in amps), bypass kilowatt hours (resettable), bypass operating hours (resettable), and bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relays output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional bypass status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, and bypass selected. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running under load in both VFD and bypass (proof of flow) in the VFD mode over serial communications or Form-C relay output. A minimum of 40 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode.

6. Run permissive circuit - there shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock control, or serial communications) the VFD and bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD system input and allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close.

7. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed contactor operation shall be indicated on the Bypass LCD display as well as over the serial communications protocol.

8. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad indication that this time delay is in process. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds.

9. The bypass control shall be programmable for manual or automatic transfer to bypass. The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will generate an automatic transfer to bypass and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass.

10. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD mode to provide proof of flow indication. The condition shall be indicated on the keypad display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and on a relay output contact closure.

11. The bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable Form-C relay outputs.

12. The relay outputs from the bypass shall programmable for any of the following indications.

a. System startedb. System runningc. Bypass override enabledd. Drive faulte. Bypass fault f. Bypass H-O-A positiong. Motor proof of flow (broken belt)h. Overloadi. Bypass selectedj. Bypass runk. System started (damper opening)l. Bypass alarmm. Over temperature

13. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power



source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC for use by others to power external devices.

14. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip – provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs.

15. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when the safety opens. Example text display indications include “Firestat”, “Freezestat”, “Over pressure” and “Low pressure”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection.

16. Class 10, 20, or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall install the drive in accordance with the requirements of the VFD manufacturer’s installation manual.

3.02 START-UP

A. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory certified service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer.

3.03 PRODUCT SUPPORT

A. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly familiar with the VFD products offered shall be locally available at both the specifying and installation locations. A toll free 24/365 technical support line shall be available.

B. A computer based training CD or 8-hour professionally generated video (VCR format) shall be provided to the owner at the time of project closeout. The training shall include installation, programming and operation of the VFD, bypass and serial communication.

3.04 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses.



HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping systems for chilled water cooling systems; blow-down drain lines; and condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include the following:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Special-duty valves.3. Hydronic specialties.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Hydronic systems are low water temperature, forced, recirculating systems and include chilled water systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic specialty and special-duty valve specified.

1. Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves, based on manufacturer's testing.

C. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.

E. Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 01.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions:



1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

D. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. Provide firestopping at all fire rated partitions in accordance with local codes and other requirements of these specifications.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


1. Calibrated Plug Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc.b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.c. Flow Design, Inc.d. Gerand Engineering Co.e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett.f. Taco, Inc.

2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Pipe Applications" Article for identifying where the following materials are used.

B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

C. Copper Pipe, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: For mechanical rooms only.

D. HDPE Pipe, 3- to 12-Inch ASTM D 3035: For all underground systems.



E. Aquatherm Pipe 2-1/2- to 12-Inch shall be used for all above grade and interior systems. Piping shall be rated for HVAC application.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

B. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.

D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

G. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234 (ASTM A 234M), Standard Weight.

H. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.2. End Connections: Butt welding.3. Facings: Raised face.

2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (silver).

C. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures.

2.05 VALVES

A. Ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Valves."

B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

C. Calibrated Plug Valves: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, bronze body, plug valve with calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening.



Valves 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) valves shall have flanged connections.

2.06 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 225 deg F (107 deg C) operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 240 deg F (116 deg C) operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.

C. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.

D. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Use Type K (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints.

B. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded joints.

C. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.

3.02 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, and butterfly valves.2. Throttling Duty: Use ball, and butterfly valves.

B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling coil and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.



E. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install piping according to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

C. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded nipple and cap.

D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.

G. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger connections.

I. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-1/2 inch NPS (DN50) and larger.

J. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.


A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) in length.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).



2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm).6. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10




mm).

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm).

3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.

3.06 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points in system in all mechanical rooms, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

3.07 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with ball valve around each control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.




A. Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.2. Flush new and existing system with clean water. Clean all new and existing strainers.3. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to

isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

4. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:

1. Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system components.

2. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid.

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Flush new and all existing hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace all new and existing strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers and replace with recommended strainer.

C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

D. Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completing system testing.



3.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.

B. Check existing expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water.

C. Perform these steps before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.4. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type).5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.7. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design requirements.8. Lubricate motors and bearings.



PREINSULATED UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 15 - 1

SECTION 23 21 15 - PREINSULATED UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Provisions of the section “General Mechanical Provisions” shall be made part of this section.


A. The supplier of the pre-insulated piping system shall be responsible for the design of the complete engineered pre-insulated piping, including carrier pipe selection, thermal insulation, protective jacketing, fittings, anchors, thrust block design, and expansion loops or expansion elbows if required.

B. If underground piping system includes Heating Hot Water piping, provide complete pre-insulated pipe manufacturer certified drawings and stress calculations indicating all provisions as outlined in 1.3.A. These drawings and stress calculations are not required for 2 pipe only chilled water systems.

C. Manufacturer shall provide a qualified technician who will be present during critical periods of the installation and testing of the system. Technician must be in the direct employ of the system Manufacturer. Technician to provide written field service reports to the Owner’s representative for all jobsite meetings. This Certified Technician service shall be priced as part of the overall project scope and shall not be an extra cost to the project owner.

D. After installation and prior to backfill, the manufacturers representative of the piping system shall field inspect the piping system and certify in writing to the Owner’s representative that the piping system has been assembled and installed within the guidelines of the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. This certification shall include, but not be limited to, trench preparation, anchor and thrust block construction and location, backfill material, expansion loop and field joint construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit details of pre-insulated piping system components including carrier pipe selection, thermal insulation thickness for each pipe size, and jacket selection.

B. Submit details of joint construction, expansion loop sizing, anchor and thrust block construction, and field insulation procedures for joints and fittings.

C. Submit pipe installation field service inspection report as described in 1.2.C.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Pre-insulated Underground Piping System:

1. Energy Task Force



2. Perma Pipe / Ricwil3. Rovanco Piping Systems4. Thermal Pipe Systems

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Pre-insulated Underground Piping System:

1. Temperature range 30 F to 250 F

a. Carrier Pipe:

1) Piping, ¼” through 1 ½”: Schedule 40 carbon steel, seamless ASTM A-106 OR Type K copper per ASTM B-88.

2) Piping, 2” through 10”: Schedule 40 carbon steel, electric resistance welded, ASTM A-53.

3) Piping, 12” and larger: Standard weight carbon steel, electric resistance welded, ASTM A-53.

4) Where possible, provide in nominal 40 foot lengths to minimize number of field joints. Allow 6” of exposed pipe to permit field joining. Size as shown on drawings.

b. Fittings: Schedule to match carrier pipe, carbon steel, butt weld, ASTM A-234. Manufacturer to provide fitting insulation kits for field insulation of fittings including hard shell mitered jacket equal in thickness to carrier pipe jacket with field applied urethane insulation and pressure sensitive tape. The use of interior PVC “zeston” style covers is not acceptable.

c. Insulation: 2 pound density polyurethane foam, 90% to 95% closed cell, K factor of .14 Btuh/sq ft/deg F/in, 2” nominal thickness.

d. Jacket: High impact seamless polyvinyl chloride(PVC) class 12454B compound conforming to ASTM 1784, Type 1, Grade 1 for pipe sizes 12” and smaller. High density polyethylene(HDPE) casing Type III, category 5, class C, conforming to ASTM D-1248 for pipe sizes 14” and larger.

e. End Seal: Provide high temperature black mastic end seal on each end of each length of pre-insulated pipe. Provide extra mastic end seal material during installation for field cut pipe. At no time during installation should insulation be directly exposed to elements.

f. Provide all necessary expansion loops, expansion elbows, anchors, wall sleeves and all necessary accessories for field assembly and insulation of fittings and straight joints.

g. Basis of design Energy Task Force ETF-MT.


3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions, including but not limited to unloading and storing of product, field application of factory end seal material for all field cut pipe, trenching with proper attention to required cover height, concrete anchor block construction, laying, welding, field joint insulation procedure, and fitting insulation procedure.

B. Prior to insulating and sealing of joints and fittings the piping system shall be visually and hydrostatically tested as specified in Performance Verification sections.



C. Comply with inspection and certification requirements as specified in 1.2 – QUALITY ASSURANCE.



REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 13 - 1

SECTION 23 23 13 - REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide refrigerant piping systems, complete in all respects, between the system components and connected equipment.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to the Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER PIPE

A. Refrigerant system piping shall be refrigerant grade, dehydrated and sealed, seamless, uniformly dead soft temper.

2.2 FITTINGS

A. Refrigerant grade, wrought copper, long radius, solder joint type.

2.3 SOLDER

A. Silver brazing alloy (Sil Fos) Fed. Spec. AA-S-56ld.

2.4 FLUX

A. Non-corrosive, specifically designed for silver brazing.



2.5 ACCESS VALVES

A. Schrader type designed for use with quick coupler hose fittings and provided with individual cap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE SIZES

A. Refrigerant pipe sizes which may be shown on drawings are nominal. Provide sizes not less than sizes indicated and in compliance with size recommended by the manufacturer(s) at the connected equipment. Provide change in sizes if such change is in accord with manufacturer's recommendation and with Architect/Engineer's approval. Size piping to maintain minimum velocity of 500-fpm in horizontal lines and 1000 fpm in vertical risers for proper oil return; provide double suction risers and hot gas risers as may be necessary to accomplish this.

3.2 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant valves, driers, expansion valves, and similar items shall be provided with each system. Where refrigerant access valves are not furnished by the manufacturer, they shall be field installed to enable charging and checking the system.

3.3 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

A. General: All joints and connections shall be made permanently refrigerant tight.

B. Solder Joints: Cut tubing square using tubing cutters, with sharp cutting wheels, so as not to crimp the tubing ends. Remove all burrs using a pipe reamer and taking care not to flare the ends of the tube. Thoroughly clean the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting using a fine sand cloth. Apply non-corrosive paste flux to the cleaned surfaces immediately and apply silver solder and heat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use care not to damage equipment or refrigerant specialty items when making up joints (protect from excessive heat).

C. Scale Prevention: During brazing, keep pipe system full of inert gas to prevent scale formation.

D. Mechanical Joints: Where the Contractor uses refrigerant tubing sets, follow the manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly, including the use of special tools, when making up the joints. Where precharged tubing and equipment is provided, do not cut into the system to install access valves.


A. Refer to other sections describing hangers and supports. Isolate copper tubing from contact with any dissimilar metals.



3.5 EVACUATION AND CHARGING

A. When other than completely factory charged equipment and piping systems are used, they shall be evacuated and charged as follows: Charge the system with dry nitrogen and refrigerant and leak test all joints including factory piping within the units. Repair all leaks by disassembling and remaking the joint. After all leaks are corrected, evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 0.2" mercury. System shall hold this vacuum for two hours with no noticeable rise in pressure. After passing vacuum test, break vacuum twice using refrigerant and re-evacuate for a minimum of two hours each time. Charge the system in the manner and with the type and amount of refrigerant recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted refrigeration practice.

3.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING CONDUIT

A. Install any refrigerant piping which is below slab or grade in Schedule 40 PVC piping. Size conduit as necessary to properly install piping. Provide long bend sweeps. Install so that conduit will drain and not trap water. Protect ends of conduit from entry by vermin, insects and water.


A. Arrange piping generally as shown and such that service access is facilitated. Keep refrigerant lines as short and direct as possible with a minimum number of joints. Provide sleeves through floors, walls or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation; seal air tight after installation of piping and insulation.

B. Provide flexible piping arrangement in hot gas discharge line of compressor. Such arrangement shall consist of a piping loop or similar measure to prevent transmission of objectional vibration.

C. Provide a removable core filter-drier in liquid line. In-line filter-driers are acceptable in individual circuits of less than 10-ton nominal capacity. Provide a full size valved bypass around this filter-drier. Provide shut-off valves to isolate the filter drier while flow is through the bypass and also a shutoff valve in the bypass so that filter-drier can be put into use.

D. Provide a refrigerant charging connection in the liquid line upstream from the filter-drier.

E. Provide a moisture indicating sight glass in the liquid line downstream from the filter-drier. Install in vertical line if possible and a sufficient distance downstream from any valve such that the resulting disturbance does not appear in the glass.

F. Provide a filter-drier with isolating shut-off valves and with valved bypass only if compressor is not equipped with a suction line filter or screen.

G. Keep piping free from traps unless otherwise indicated. Install vertical pipe plumb. Pitch horizontal piping only where slope is desirable.

H. Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet to all condensers, receivers and evaporators to permit isolation for service. If possible, use angle valves to minimize pressure drop. Use angle valves in all cases at receivers. Use globe valves only when angle valves are impractical.



I. Provide solenoid valves upright in horizontal lines only, unless their design allows installation in vertical pipe.

J. Where compressor(s) do not have pump down control and the compressor(s) associated evaporator coil(s) do not have bottom suction header connections and the evaporator coil(s) are located above the compressor(s), then loop suction lines(s) to top level of coil to prevent liquid slugging.

K. To prevent erratic operation of thermal expansion valve, provide a suction line trap next to evaporator coil suction outlet with expansion valve bulb located between coil and trap. Provide only in suction lines which are level leaving coil outlet or which rise on leaving coil outlet. Trap not required when evaporator coil outlet suction line drops to compressor or suction header immediately after expansion valve bulb.



DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 1

SECTION 23 31 00 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited to, the following: outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price.

B. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items:

1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork.2. Acoustical thermal duct liner.3. Low pressure flexible ducts.


A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions" for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.

B. This section is directly related in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following:

1. Sections describing air handling equipment and fans.2. Air distribution devices.3. Terminal units.4. Duct system accessories.5. Insulation.

C. Coordinate shop drawings, ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

D. Refer to other sections which may describe additional sound attenuation measures which may relate to this section.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 2

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data as applicable to this project on: all prefabricated duct and fittings; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; duct sealing materials; duct joining and seaming methods; and all other items.


A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimensions which do not include insulation thickness.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc."

B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities less than 2500 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches wg. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork". SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", latest Edition, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified.

C. High Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities equal to or greater than 2500 fpm or static pressure equal to or greater than 2.0 inches wg. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "High Velocity Ductwork" or "Medium Pressure Ductwork", but shall be considered, in either terminology, to fall within pressure/velocity class (PV/C designation) 3 to 10. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", latest Edition, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified.

1.7 PRESSURE/VELOCITY CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Pressure and velocity classifications (hereinafter called "P/VC") for ducts are defined as follows:

PositiveSMACNA Static or SMACNA Maximum

P/VC Pressure Pressure Negative Seal VelocityDesig. Class Rating Pressure Class (fpm)

10 High 10" + A 2000 up6 Medium 6" + A 2000 up

4 Medium 4" + A 4000 dn3 Medium 3" + or - B 4000 dn2 Low 2" + or - C 2500 dn1 Low 1" + or - C 2500 dn½ Low 1/2" + or - C 2000 dn

B. See Part 3, EXECUTION, of this section for duct sealing requirements.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials shall comply with current SMACNA standards.

B. ASTM: Unless otherwise specified, ASTM material specifications applicable are:

Material Type ASTM NumberGalvanized steel G90 A635Stainless steel 304,316 A240Cold rolled steel 20-28 ga. A366Cold rolled steel 18 ga. A619Aluminum 3003 H-14 B609

C. Special Materials, Gauges and Construction:

1. Special Materials: Where special duct material other than galvanized steel is required, such duct material (e.g., fiberglass, stainless steel, plastic such as polyvinylchloride, etc.) shall be specifically indicated.

2. Gauges: Gauges indicated in this section are for galvanized steel. Where greater or lesser gauges are specifically indicated for a sheet metal material other than galvanized steel, provide the indicated gauge. Comply with the SMACNA construction standard covering the required material if no gauge is given.

3. Construction: Comply with indicated special requirements (i.e., such as welding, soldering, etc.) where application requires.

2.2 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A. Material: Prime quality forty-eight inch wide resquare tight coat galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-635 and/or A-527 as applicable to the intended use.

B. Construction:

1. Construct to comply with the pressure/velocity classification(s) indicated.2. Use rectangular or round as indicated on drawings.3. Reinforcing, Cross Breaking, Seams, Joints: Be in accord with latest SMACNA

construction standard for low pressure sheet metal duct.4. Gauge: As required by SMACNA for the dimensions and pressure/velocity classification

involved.

C. Insulation:

1. Rigid sheet metal ductwork: Where low pressure ductwork is designated to have internal acoustical/thermal liner, provide factory fabricated double wall ductwork as specified for high pressure round acoustically lined sound attenuating duct (i.e., factory fabricated double wall duct with perforated inner wall).

2.3 ACOUSTICAL THERMAL DUCT LINER

A. Line ductwork where indicated. Dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions. Liner shall be one inch thick, three pound density fiberglass duct liner with the surface in contact with moving air stream stabilized with black pigmented neoprene. Duct liner shall comply with


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 4

requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. Duct liner shall be factory treated with antimicrobial/antibacterial treatment to prevent formation & growth of bacteria.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johns-Manville, Microtex; PPG Industries, Testrafine; or Certain-Teed/Saint Gobain, Coated Ultralite.

C. Attachment: Attach to the interior of sheet metal ducts using a full coverage coat of Foster's 85-20 adhesive and mechanical fasteners applied as follows:

1. Horizontal Ducts: Install mechanical fasteners on underside of the tops of ducts over twelve inches in width and on the insides of ducts over sixteen inches in height.

2. Vertical Ducts: Install mechanical fasteners on all duct surfaces exceeding twelve inches.

3. Fastener Spacing: Install fasteners within two inches of the leading edge of each duct section and within three inches of the leading edge of cross joints in insulation within any given duct section. Pins shall thereafter be spaced at not more than fifteen inches on centers. Pins shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Edge Stabilization: All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of liner shall be coated with Foster's 30-36.

2.4 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General:

1. The inclusion of flexible ducts in this specification shall not be construed as approval of use on the project unless specifically shown on the Drawings.

2. Where used, provide in factory finished lengths not in excess of lengths required to make kink-free connections with minimum air pressure drop.

B. Insulated flexible ducts: Flexible duct shall be factory-fabricated preinsulated type with seamless vapor barrier. Duct shall bear UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct label and shall comply with NFPA 90A and 90B. Fiberglass insulation nominal 1" thickness with thermal conductance of 0.23 BTU/hr-ft2-oF maximum at 75oF mean temperature. Flexible duct shall have an operating range of minus 0.5" w.g. to plus 2" w.g. Core shall be continuous and consist of aluminized mylar laminated to corrosion resistant steel wire helix. Vapor barrier perm rating shall be 0.17 maximum per ASTM E96-A. Maximum working velocity shall be 4000 FPM. Flexible duct shall be Genflex SLR-25, Clevaflex Type KQ, Wire Mold type WG, Flexmaster Type 5B, or approved equal.

C. Un-insulated flexible ducts, steel: Flexible ductwork shall be constructed of all metal one ply hot-dipped galvanized steel, closely corrugated for strength and flexibility, with seams interlocked, folded flat, and knurled to insure tightness. Duct shall be listed as #UL181 "Flexible Air Duct", Class 1, and NFPA 90A. Products shall be Flexmaster Type NI-TL, Clevaform Type GS or approved equal.

D. Round branch take-off fittings for flexible duct:

1. Round duct branch take-off fitting shall be made of galvanized sheet metal designed for twist-in installation and to assure minimum air loss at the take-off. The fittings shall be of the conical converging type to reduce the pressure drop through the fittings. Provide a raised bead on the throat of the fitting to assure a tight positive connection. Products shall be Flexmaster Model CB-DE-BO3 or approved equal.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 5

2. Provide each fitting with the following:

a. Lockable quadrant damper.b. 45-degree extractor scoop.c. Insulation guard where used with internally lined ductwork.

3. Provide these "spin-in" type fittings at all connections between rigid sheet metal duct and flexible duct at the upstream end of the flexible duct.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All duct systems shall be free of noise, chatter, vibration and pulsation under all conditions of operation. Remove, replace or reinforce as directed by the Architect/Engineer if necessary to correct such conditions.

B. If field conditions are determined to exist which would limit the guarantee of air delivery or system performance, due notice in writing shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer of such conditions prior to starting fabrication.

C. Properly support and align ductwork. Ducts to be free of sag and bulge. Hang ductwork below concrete floors or roof deck with hangers set prior to pouring concrete, or from self drilling screw anchors. GUN POWDER SET ANCHORS ARE NOT PERMITTED.

D. Where it is necessary that ducts be divided due to pipes or other obstructions which must pass through these ducts, the Contractor shall, at locations as noted or directed, provide air-stream deflectors in the duct and the duct shall be increased in size to maintain equivalent area around deflectors. Such changes shall be in accord with standard SMACNA details and shall be shown on Contractor's As-Built Drawings.

E. Interior of ductwork visible through registers, grilles, or diffusers shall be painted flat black.

F. Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

G. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accord with the latest indicated editions of applicable SMACNA construction standards. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

H. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities.

I. Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect/Engineer's final acceptance of project.

J. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interferences with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect/Engineer if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect/Engineer's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions which are minor at no additional cost.

K. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 6

L. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5 unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect/Engineer. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes.

M. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.).

N. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained.

O. If necessary where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free-clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged.

P. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical, rectangular or round rigid duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length.

Q. Make connections from any low pressure ductwork to terminal units (fan terminal units, variable volume boxes, etc.) with appropriate lengths of flexible duct unless other type of connection is indicated.

R. Install all flexible round duct without kinks or similar obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Cut and remove excess lengths as necessary.

S. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements.

T. Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct.

3.2 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTS

A. If width or height of rectangular duct exceeds 12 inches, cross break or roll a cross bead in panels to increase stiffness; otherwise, use two gages heavier steel.

B. Provide corner closures. Longitudinal seams and transverse joints shall be flat and smooth inside. Make slip joints in direction of air flow. See governing SMACNA manual for transition requirements.

C. Fabricate offsets, turns and elbows with centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times diameter when possible. No mitered offsets will be allowed. Provide double thickness turning vanes to assist in smooth flow of air in square elbows or elbows with centerline radius less than duct width or diameter.

3.3 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Flexible ducts shall not be used unless specifically indicated on drawings.

B. If flexible duct is indicated for use on this project, it must comply with the following requirements.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 7

1. The extent of the use of flexible ductwork shall be limited to that shown on the drawings.2. Flexible duct installation shall be per SMACNA Flexible Duct Installation Standards, and

manufacturers latest printed instructions, whichever is stricter. In addition the following shall apply:

a. Flexible duct between rigid duct and diffusers shall be a MAXIMUM of 8 feet in length and shall be fully extended with a maximum equivalent of (2) 90 degree bends (no bend shall be made with centerline radius of less than one duct diameter). No additional flexible duct shall be provided for future terminal device relocation unless otherwise specified.

b. Flexible duct shall be supported at ends and at each 90 degree bend. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2 inch per foot of spacing between supports.

c. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case will the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1 inch wide. Narrower hanger material may be used in conjunction with a sheet metal saddle which meets the foregoing specifications. This saddle must be formed to cover one-half the circumference of the outside diameter of the flexible duct and must be rolled to fit neatly around the lower half of the duct's outer circumference.

d. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when manufacturers recommended procedures are followed.

e. Hangers shall be adequately attached to the building structure (not pipe, conduit, etc.).

f. To prevent tearing of vapor barrier, do not support entire weight of flexible duct on any one hanger during installation. Avoid contact of flexible duct with sharp edges of hanger material. Damage to vapor barrier may be repaired with approved tape. If internal core is penetrated, replace flexible duct or treat as a connection.

3. Terminal devices connected by flexible duct shall be supported independently of the flexible duct.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS DUCT SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Spin-In Take-Off Fittings: Install around duct branch takeoff fittings according to manufacturer's installation instruction. Additionally seal fitting to rectangular duct with a thin bead of mastic sealant.


A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standard. Where sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application.

B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion.

C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps or drop through connections from the metal or concrete deck.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 8

3.6 CHANGES IN SHAPE OR DIMENSION

A. Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall apply:

1. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches.

2. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches is preferable, space permitting.

3. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow on the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect/Engineer.

3.7 CHANGES IN DIRECTION

A. Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following shall apply:

1. Supply duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow.

2. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows, as specified hereinbefore for supply ducts, unless radius elbows are indicated in which case they shall be constructed with a turning radius one and one-half (1-1/2) times the width (with width considered as the dimension in the plane of the turn) as measured to the duct centerline.

3. Tees in low pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified hereinbefore for elbows.

4. Branch take-offs in low pressure supply duct shall be made with extractors or splitter dampers, as indicated, in square take-offs.

5. In high pressure duct, branch take-offs and connections to flexible duct supplying air to terminal units shall be made with conical taps.

3.8 IMPROPER MATERIALS OR CONFIGURATION

A. If ductwork materials or ductwork configurations are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor shall remove such ductwork and replace with materials or configurations which are acceptable. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor.


A. Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct.

B. Control Devices: Properly install all control related devices which are part of the duct systems. See Section(s) describing control systems.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 9

3.10 SEALING OF DUCTS

A. Duct seal classes are as follows:

1. Seal class "A": Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Use for P/VC-4 (4" w.g.) and greater unless otherwise indicated.

2. Seal class "B": Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. Use for P/VC-3 (3" w.g.) unless otherwise indicated.

3. Seal class "C": Seal all transverse joints. Use for P/VC-2 (2" w.g.) and lower unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where sealing is required it shall mean the following:

1. The use of adhesives, gaskets, tape systems or combinations thereof to close openings in the surface of the ductwork and field-erected plenums and casings through which air leakage would occur; or

2. The use of continuous welds;3. The prudent selection and application of sealing methods by fabricators and installers,

giving due consideration to the designated pressure class, pressure mode (positive or negative), chemical compatibility of the closure system, potential movement of mating parts, workmanship, amount and type of handling; cleanliness of surfaces, product shelf life, curing time and manufacturer-identified exposure limitations;

4. That these provisions are applicable to duct connections to equipment and to apparatus but are not for equipment and apparatus;

5. That where distinctions between seams and joints are made herein, a seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of air-flow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. Helical (spiral) lock seams are exempt from sealant requirements. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints. Joints are inclusive of but not limited to girth joints; branch and sub-branch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum and casing abutments to building structures; that sealing requirements herein do not contain provisions to:

a. Resist chemical attack.b. Be dielectrically isolated.c. Be waterproof, weatherproof or ultraviolet ray resistant.d. Withstand temperatures higher than 120oF or lower than 40oF.e. Contain atomic radiation or serve in other safety-related construction.f. Be electrically grounded.g. Maintain leakage integrity at pressures in excess of the duct classification herein.h. Be underground below the water table.i. Be submerged in liquid.j. Withstand continuous vibration visible to the naked eye.k. Be totally leak-free within an encapsulating vapor barrier.l. Create closure in portions of the building structure used as ducts, e.g., ceiling

plenums, shafts, pressurized compartments.

6. The requirements to seal apply to both positive pressure and negative pressure of operation.

7. Externally insulated ducts located outside of buildings shall be sealed prior to being insulated as though they were inside. If metal surfaces of ducts located on the exterior of buildings are exposed to weather, they shall receive exterior duct sealant. An exterior duct sealant is defined as a sealant that is marketed specifically as forming a positive air and water tight seal, bonding well to the metal involved, remaining flexible with metal


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 10

movement and having a service temperature range of -30oF to 175oF. If exposed to direct sunlight it shall also be ultraviolet ray and ozone resistant or shall, after curing, be painted with a compatible coating that provides such resistance. The term sealant herein is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but is inclusive of tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.

C. Materials and applications for sealing ducts:

1. General:

a. Complete product data on all materials used for sealing ducts must be submitted for approval prior to any duct fabrication.

b. All sealants must be specifically recommended by their manufacturer for the purpose of sealing ducts.

2. Liquid Sealant:

a. Use only for slip type joints where sealant is to fill small space between overlapping pieces of metal. Do not use where metal clearances exceed 1/32-inch.

b. Sealant must be specifically manufactured for the purpose of sealing ducts.

3. Mastics:

a. Use in lieu of liquid sealant at Contractor's option.b. Use as a fillet, in grooves and between flanges.c. Do not use oil base caulking or glazing compounds.

4. Gaskets:

a. Use soft elastomer butyl or neoprene rubber or extruded forms of sealants in flanged joints in addition to mastic.

5. Tape:

a. Tape is not allowed on sheet metal ducts.

6. Combination of mastic and embedded fabric:

a. Use mastic/mesh/mastic as a sealant where pressure/velocity classification equals and exceeds P/VC-3 and where any spaces between metal surfaces at transverse joints or longitudinal seams or duct wall penetrations exceeds 1/16-inch.

b. Apply glove coat of mastic, then embed a continuous or overlapping strip of not less than 4-inch wide 10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the mastic, then apply a final glove coat of mastic over the glass cloth.

7. Surface preparation:

a. Surfaces to receive sealant should be adequately clean (free from oil, dust, dirt, rust, moisture, ice crystals and other substances that inhibit or prevent bonding). Use solvent and/or apply a face primer if necessary to obtain adequately clean surface for adhesion.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 11

3.11 LEAKAGE TESTING

A. General:

1. Test the following duct systems:

a. All ducts which are (1) under positive or negative pressure and (2) which are directly connected to air moving device (air handling unit, exhaust fan, supply fan or similar air moving equipment) and (3) which convey 1000-cfm or greater through their largest portion.

b. All ducts which are (1) under positive or negative pressure and (2) which are part of a supply, return, outside and/or exhaust air system and (3) which are equal to or greater than 25 feet in length and (4) which may or may not be directly connected to an air moving device.

2. Portions of duct to be tested shall consist of all portions from the largest cross sectional area to the air distribution device connection or to the smallest inlet or outlet point, whichever is applicable.

3. Duct systems shall be constructed so that leakage does not exceed 5.00% of the air quantity handled by the respective fan.

B. Allowable Leakage:

1. Leakage shall be measured during leakage test at a test pressure which is equal to the pressure/velocity classification of the duct system (e.g., a P/VC-2 duct shall be tested at 2.0 in. w.g.s.p., a P/VC-1/2 duct at 0.5 in. w.g.s.p., etc.).

C. Test Procedure:

1. Test at time of duct installation and prior to installation of any field applied insulation and prior to any concealment in chases or similar enclosures.

2. Duct openings (both entry openings and outlet openings) shall be capped or sealed by taping or banding a flexible plastic sheet over each opening prior to pressurizing duct. The plastic sheet shall be of adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test pressures. Use other method of sealing duct openings providing objective of test is obtained and if method of sealing is approved by Architect/Engineer.

3. Use a fan having a minimum capacity of 300-cfm or 5% of the particular duct system design capacity, whichever is greater and which is capable of producing a duct test pressure of 150% of the duct test pressure.

4. Test fan shall be connected to a flow measuring assembly consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with appropriately located pressure taps. Orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressures shall be measured with U-tube manometers and corresponding flow rates obtained from the orifice performance curve.

5. Connect test fan and orifice flow measuring assembly to the duct to be tested with a section of flexible duct.

6. Test for audible leaks as follows:

a. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct.

b. Start the blower with its control damper closed (some small blowers popularly used for testing ducts may damage the duct because they can develop pressures up to 25 inches (W.G.).

c. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure.


DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 12

d. Survey all joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealing has been repaired if and where necessary.

7. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows:

a. Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure.

b. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed five (5) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections (such as supply section, return section, etc.) of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.

8. Correct any duct leaks which are detected either audibly or by touch regardless of whether leakage through duct system is less than allowable test leakage.

3.12 DEFINITIONS OF DUCT TYPES

A. Refer to the "Duct Construction Schedule" on the Drawings for:

1. The type of ductwork and where it is to be installed.2. The pressure/velocity class at each location.3. Indication of whether the ductwork is to be insulated externally or internally lined or not

insulated.



DUCT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00 - DUCT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply return, exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated.

B. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following items as may be applicable to this project:

1. Flexible duct connections.2. Splitters.3. Turning vanes.4. Manual volume dampers.5. Access doors.6. Fire dampers.




1. Ductwork.2. Air distribution devices.3. All types of air handling equipment.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all items affecting the duct systems including but not limited to the following items: air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work.



1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Include complete data on: access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters and all other items.

B. See section entitled, "General Mechanical Provisions".


A. Provide all components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All ductwork dimensions indicated which may affect items of this section are nominal free clearance internal dimensions which do not include insulation thickness.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application.

B. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Ventfabrics2. Barber-Colman3. Tuttle & Bailey4. Dura-Dyne5. Airsan6. Titus7. Anemostat8. Young9. Metalaire10. United McGill

C. Products which are specified may not necessarily all be required on the projects; provide those products which are applicable.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect to their ductwork.

B. At least 4 inches long.



C. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus, or heavy gauge steel sleeves).

D. For use in high and/or low pressure duct systems.

E. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge", or equivalent.

2.3 SPLITTERS

A. Provide for adjustment of air volume to their respective branches, where indicated. Constructed of at least the same gauge galvanized steel as the duct wherein they are used, and in no instance be less than twenty-two (22) US gauge. Use in low pressure duct systems only. Be adequately sized to close off air to applicable branches. Rigidly attached to pivot rod and operating linkage. Install on raised insulated base when used in internally insulated ductwork. Splitter blades; formed in two thicknesses of metal so that entering edge presents rounded nose to air flow; length no less than one and one half times the width of the smaller branch served or twelve inches, whichever is larger. Hardware used for the construction, assembly, and operation of splitter dampers shall be as follows:

1. Operators for exposed splitters and those located above "lay-in" or accessible ceiling shall be Ventlok #690 splitter damper assembly.

2. Operators for concealed splitters shall be Ventlok #691 with #680 miter and #677 concealed regulator.

2.4 LOW PRESSURE METAL TURNING VANES

A. Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be completely flutterproof; properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber-Colman or other approved manufacturer. Be Barber-Colman "Airturns", Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns", or Dura-Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes, or equivalent.

2.5 HIGH PRESSURE TURNING VANES

A. None required for this project.

2.6 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. These dampers are to be other than those specified as being integral with each register, diffuser and other air outlet or inlet.

B. Provided where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s).

C. Opposed blade type.



D. 8" maximum blade width.

E. Made of galvanized steel, steel with acid/solvent chemical resistant coating, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish; flutterproof.

F. Provided so that all damper adjustment can be made from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating the ductwork and/or its vapor barrier.

G. Fully adjustable and with locking device.

H. Manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Greenheck or equivalent.

I. Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse effects on the distribution device.

J. Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types:

1. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay-in" or "accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 817 or equivalent.

2. Dampers in ducts concealed above plaster ceilings or behind dry wall construction: Young Regulator Company Model 817A or equivalent.

K. Use in low pressure duct system only.

2.7 LOW PRESSURE DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Provided for: each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary.

B. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in which installed, whichever is greater).

C. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operation):

Max. Duct Dimensions Access Door Size

11" and less 10" x 12"12" through 16" 12" x 16"17" and over 16" x 24"

D. Doors shall be provided with and operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlok "Access Doors". Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations using Ventlok #360 sealant or equivalent.



2.8 TEST OPENINGS

A. Furnish and install gasketed capped test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling unit and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlok #699-2 or equivalent.

2.9 PREFABRICATED DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. At Contractor's option, prefabricated duct connections as manufactured by Ductmate (or approved equal system) may be used in locations and applications for which the duct connection system is recommended. Use of these connections must meet or exceed specified duct construction quality as related to structural rigidity, pressure, accessibility and other such requirements.

2.10 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Rating: 1-1/2 hours (UL approved for installation in 2 hour walls).

B. Construction: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel frame suitable for connection to ductwork without transition, minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel curtain type blades located out of the airstream, thickness coordinated with wall construction. Where an active smoke control system exists (refer to Section 23 09 93) the damper shall be capable of closing in an airstream moving at a minimum of 2000 feet per minute and operating at 4" w.g. pressure (dynamic damper).

C. Sleeves: UL listed minimum gauge galvanized steel with welded construction corners. Rollformed sleeves will not be acceptable unless contractor guarantees in writing to seal voids in sleeve with UL approved sealer to limit air leakage. Length of sleeve shall be coordinated with the wall or floor.

D. Operation: Stainless steel constant force closure spring.

E. Link Setting: 160°F or 165°F.

F. Based on Ruskin Manufacturing Co. IBD2 Style B. (Static Systems).

G. Based on Ruskin Manufacturing Co., DIBD2 Style B. (Active smoke control systems only).

2.11 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Ductwork:

1. Rating: Up to 1" wg positive or negative.2. Frame: Minimum 16 gauge (.064") galvanized steel or extruded aluminum.

3. Blades: Minimum 16 gauge (.064") galvanized steel or extruded aluminum parallel blade action, brass bearing, non-ferrous or de-iron pivot pins, gasketed blades.

4. Accessories: Counter balance and weights suitable for assisting or retarding as indicated on the drawings.

5. Based on Ruskin Manufacturing, Co. CBD4.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Construct and install all accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions of applicable SMACNA construction standards.

B. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes.

C. Install all duct system accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. All accessories installed in poly-vinyl-steel ductwork shall have acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating.

E. All manual damper arms shall be tagged with fluorescent colored strip.

3.2 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire dampers shall be provided where indicated.

B. Review the architectural drawings to determine the wall construction rating so as to provide the proper rated damper.

C. All fire dampers shall be mounted within a UL approved thickness galvanized steel sleeve permanently affixed to the wall by means of perimeter retaining angles.

D. The fire damper shall be permanently attached to the sleeve. All voids around the sleeve and damper and sleeve and wall shall be properly sealed with fire barrier material, refer to division 07.

E. Ductwork shall be attached to the fire damper by means of a UL approved break away connection.

F. Access doors or access sections shall be provided at all fire damper locations.

3.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPER

A. Securely attach backdraft damper to wall with a suitable sleeve and retaining angles and seal all voids between damper and wall.

B. Adjust damper to open or close under the design conditions.



SOUND ATTENUATORS 23 33 19 - 1

SECTION 23 33 19 - SOUND ATTENUATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators of the types, sizes, and acoustical and airflow characteristics indicated.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data on: dimensions, airside pressure losses, dynamic insertion losses, regenerated sound level (i.e. self-noise or airflow generated noise), performance certification, performance test method, and materials of construction.

1.5 MANUFACTURER

A. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Rink Division of Krueger/Phillips Industries2. Commercial Acoustics3. Transonics4. Industrial Noise Control, Inc.5. Titus6. United McGill Corporation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTER CASINGS

A. The outer casings of the attenuators shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel with seams lock formed and mastic filled, or shall be continuously welded.


SOUND ATTENUATORS 23 33 19 - 2

2.2 PARTITIONS

A. The interior partitions of the attenuators shall be constructed of not less than 24 gauge galvanized perforated steel.

2.3 FILLER MATERIALS

A. The silencer filler material shall be inorganic mineral glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and shall be packed at not less than five percent (5%) compression to prevent the formation of voids due to vibration or settling. The material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof, and shall comply with the flame spread and smoke developed ratings of NFPA 90A.

2.4 PERFORMANCE

A. Acoustic and aerodynamic performance shall be tested and certified in accordance with ASTM E477-84 Standard Method of Testing Duct Liner Material and Prefabricated Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow Performance. Airflow pressure drops shall be tested in accordance with AMCA Standards. The performance indicated is not a band-by-band listing of the silencer scheduled, but reflects actual minimum attenuation (in decibels) for the indicated octave bands at the design conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Refer to manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of Section entitled "Ductwork" for installation and supporting requirements.

B. Where multiple sound attenuators are assembled, by either the manufacturer or the installer, into attenuator banks, the individual attenuators shall be securely fastened together using galvanized steel bands, straps, structural angles and/or welds, as recommended by the manufacturer. All joints between the assembled attenuators shall be sealed to prevent air leakage as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with sizes of ducts to be connected to attenuators. Provide duct transitions to match sizes of attenuators and attenuator banks if duct sizes differ from sizes of attenuators and attenuator banks furnished.



TERMINAL UNITS: VAV, SINGLE INLET, ELECTRIC COIL 23 36 16 - 1

SECTION 23 36 16 - TERMINAL UNITS: VAV, SINGLE INLET, ELECTRIC COIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

1.6 NOISE CRITERIA

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, the following noise criteria comprise the basis upon which the selected terminal units must be rated in order to comply with the design limits for allowable NC levels:

1. All sound power level decibels are referenced to 10 to the minus 12 watts.2. Room outlet NC sound pressure levels specified for these TUs are based on 10db room

absorption.3. Room radiated NC sound pressure levels specified for these TUs are based on 10db

room absorption plus 13 NC ceiling sound transmission loss.4. The maximum allowable NC level in any occupied space (unless otherwise indicated)

shall not exceed NC35 as a result of radiated or discharge noise from any terminal unit.



5. NC levels which are generated by the terminal units on which noise criteria will be judged are those NC levels generated when the terminal unit is operating with an inlet static pressure of 1.0-inch w.g.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

2.2 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Environmental Technologies, Inc.2. METALAIRE, Inc.3. Nailor Industries Inc.4. Price Industries.5. Titus.6. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size.4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized steel housing; with primary automatic and secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

1. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.2. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air

temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.)

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4655&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456807302&mf=04&src=wd








3. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.4. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.5. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.6. Mercury contactors.7. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

F. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 23 09 23 "Direct Digital Control System" and shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with

electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode, as indicated on plans.b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 23 09 23

"Direct Digital Control System."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted, with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches thick.3. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.



3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance.3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.4. Verify that control connections are complete.5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.



AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 13 - 1

SECTION 23 37 13 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide all air distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein for a complete and operable system.



B. Coordinate with work of the ceiling, drywall and plastering trades as required to insure an orderly progression of work and a first class finished system with respect to placement, alignment, finish, general fit and absence of conflict with lighting systems and fire protection systems.

Insulate air distribution devices to prevent condensation formation.

1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 35 based on sound pressure levels in db re 0.002 microbars unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures and equipment actually provided to insure that this design constraint is not exceeded by the system installed.

Exceptions: Any particular rooms or areas which are normally occupied by other than maintenance staff or service staff and which may be noted on the drawings as requiring lower NC criteria.

B. Pressure Drop: Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.15 in wg static pressure unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".



1.6 MANUFACTURER


1. Titus2. Metalaire3. Price4. Krueger5. Carnes

B. Manufacturers must be members of the Air Distribution Council unless otherwise indicated.


A. All aluminum is to be extruded unless otherwise indicated.

B. Appearance: Each air distribution device which has a portion thereof (frame, core, etc.) exposed to view in the finished area shall have a factory applied finish which matches and is compatible with the color of the surrounding surface on which the device is installed. Colors must be approved by Architect prior to device fabrication.

C. All louvers, dampers and/or shutters shall be rated by their manufacturer in accord with AMCA Standard 500-74.

D. Integral Components: All dampers, blank-off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of air distribution device shall be factory made items produced by the manufacturer of air distribution device.

E. Louvers: Louvers may be specified in another division but for reference may also be indicated on mechanical drawings.

F. Door Grilles: Door grilles may be specified in another division but for reference may also be indicated on mechanical drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide the following air distribution devices as applicable to this project. Refer to air distribution device schedule as shown on drawings.


A. All devices must each comply with the applicable portions of the Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062R4 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual", the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Standard 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters" and the "National Fire Protection Association" (NFPA) Standard 90A "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".



B. Provide ceiling and/or linear diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of diffuser.

C. Diffusers, grilles and registers installed in fire rated ceiling, or floor/ceiling assemblies shall be constructed of steel.

D. Mounting Screws: Where grilles, diffusers or registers are specified which require mounting screws visible from the face of the device these screws shall be furnished with the air distribution equipment and be finished at the factory to match the finish on the grille, diffuser or register in which they are to be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install neatly where indicated in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with SMACNA recommendations and as otherwise indicated.

B. Properly test, balance and adjust to produce quiet, draftless operation to best degree possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Rectangular Diffusers: Where diffusers are the lay-in type, they shall be supported by the inverted T-bar suspension system but all ducts connected thereto shall be supported independently of the ceiling as specified under Section entitled "Ductwork". Surface mounted diffusers shall be supported by the duct runouts or drops where sheet metal ducts are indicated and by separate hangers where flex runouts are indicated. All rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building line and properly aligned with the ceiling.

B. Sidewall Grilles and Registers: Mount securely to the duct system flanges using finish screws and in accordance with accepted good practice.

C. Ceiling mounted Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles: Mount as specified hereinbefore for surface mounted ceiling diffusers except use finished screws provided and secure to duct and finished ceiling (or finished ceiling for nonducted returns) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where required to provide adequate support for nonducted registers or grilles, provide appropriate mounting frame for incorporation into the ceiling system.

D. Install all outlets and inlets as recommended by the manufacturer; in accordance with recognized industry practices; to insure that products serve intended functions.

E. Locate ceiling air outlets and inlets as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. Install square and parallel with partitions, ceiling grid members, etc.

F. Spare Parts: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of outlet and inlet that require them.



G. Do not install blank-offs under continuous linear diffuser distribution plenums. Distribution plenums shall cover only active portion of the diffuser.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Coordinate the installation of the air distribution equipment with related work and finishing of adjacent surfaces to prevent damage to the devices or adjacent finishes. Protect the finish of all air distribution equipment until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the Architect's satisfaction any damaged equipment.



ROOF AIR INTAKES AND RELIEF VENTS 23 37 24 - 1

SECTION 23 37 24 - ROOF AIR INTAKES AND RELIEF VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide factory assembled roof air intake(s) and relief vent(s) where indicated. Sizes and operating characteristics shall be as scheduled on drawings or as otherwise indicated.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data on sizes; required clearances; direction of air flow; construction and dimensions; and capacities, static pressure losses, free areas and other operating characteristics.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS


1. Acme2. Ilg3. Cook4. Jenn-Air5. Penn6. Carnes7. Greenheck8. Powerline

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Sized as indicated.


ROOF AIR INTAKES AND RELIEF VENTS 23 37 24 - 2

B. Low silhouette type.

C. Rain-tight under all operating conditions.

D. Constructed of any of the following materials: all fiberglass, spun or extruded aluminum, galvanized steel.

E. Pass indicated air quantities at not greater than 0.05 inches w.g. total pressure or as scheduled and, for intakes only, 500 fpm maximum throat and perimeter velocity.

F. 1/4" Mesh galvanized steel or PVC coated bird screen. Provided with parallel or opposed blade volume dampers and/or backdraft dampers where indicated.

G. Hood and curb assembly shall meet the wind load requirements of the Florida Building Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACEMENT AND MOUNTING

A. Location shall be essentially as shown on the drawings, however, actual placement of the roof curb shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation on this project. Mount items in strict accord with manufacturer's instructions. Permanently secure to roof curbs.

3.2 DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Connect ducts (where required) to roof curb inlet flanges using flexible connectors. Install connectors properly so that they are not in tension and are aligned with ductwork.

3.3 TEST AND BALANCE

A. Unless specified otherwise and prior to requesting final inspection, operate equipment and adjust to achieve design air flow.



LOUVERS 23 37 25 - 1

SECTION 23 37 25 - LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide complete louver assemblies as indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to the section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

1.3 CERTIFICATION

A. All performance shall be certified by AMCA and bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration in accord with AMCA Standard 550.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Stationary type; extruded aluminum construction.

B. All components factory assembled by the louver manufacturer including heads, jambs, sills, blades and mullions. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be assembled at the site from factory assembled louver sections to provide the overall sizes required.

C. Frame:

1. 4-inch depth.2. Suitable for mounting in the type of wall where indicated. Coordinate with wall

construction indicated on architectural drawings.3. Extruded aluminum of 0.100-inches minimum thickness.4. Provided with caulking slots.

D. Blades:

1. Drainable type with drain gutter in each blade and downspouts in jambs and mullions.2. Extruded aluminum of 0.081-inch minimum thickness.3. Approximately 37-1/2-degree blade angle.4. Blades on approximately 3-inch centers.

E. Finish:

1. Clear anodized.

F. Operating characteristics:

1. High free area.2. Low water penetration.


LOUVERS 23 37 25 - 2

3. Free area based on air velocity of not greater than 500 fpm.4. Air flow pressure drop in intake mode or exhaust mode of not greater than 0.025-inches

w.g.s.p.

G. Design: Limit span between visible mullions to 10-feet and shall incorporate such other structural supports required to withstand a wind load of 50 lbs. per sq. ft.

H. Size: As scheduled or shown on Drawings or as required to comply with the above operating characteristic constraints.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Bird screen: Aluminum, 3/4-inch mesh, typical for all louvers.

B. Insect screen: Aluminum, 18-16 mesh, where indicated on drawings.

C. Frame: Flange, 1-1/2-inch nominal width for louvers of sizes 24" wide X 12" high and smaller; non-flanged, suitable for cased opening mounting for louvers of sizes greater than 24" wide x 12" high.


A. Basis of Design: Ruskin Model ELF-6375DXD. Acceptable: equivalent products of American Warming & Ventilating; Carnes; Greenheck; Krueger; Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Metal Industries; or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with applicable portions of current SMACNA guidelines.

B. Installation shall be watertight between complete circumference of frame and wall.

C. Coordinate complete installation with other work related to structure, wall construction, ductwork (if any) and other such interfaces.

D. For additional requirements, refer to Architectural drawings and other portions of the Contract Documents.



AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM 23 43 24 - 1

SECTION 23 43 24 - AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section describes the design, performance and installation of an air purification system intended for use as part of another manufacturer’s air handling unit or mounted on the duct as shown on the plans, details and equipment schedules.

1.2 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The following codes and standards are referenced through out. The edition to be used is that currently enforced by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) or in absence of such direction that referenced by the current enforceable IBC code or as indicated by the contract documents, except where specifically referenced by this section of the specifications.

1. ASHRAE Standards 62 & 52 2. National Electric Code NFPA 703. UL 867

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

B. Facility Access and Protection

C. Ductwork

D. Filters

E. Water and Refrigerant Piping

F. Electrical Wiring

G. Control Wiring


A. The Air Purification System shall be a product of an established manufacturer within the USA.

B. A qualified representative from the manufacturer shall be available to inspect the installation of the air purification system to ensure installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

C. Technologies that do not address gas disassociation such as UV Lights, Powered Particulate Filters and/or polarized media filters shall not be considered. Uni-polar ion generators shall not be acceptable. “Plasma” particulate filters shall not be acceptable.



D. Projects designed using ASHRAE Standard 62, IAQ Procedure shall require the manufacturer to provide Indoor Air Quality calculations using the formulas within ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 to validate acceptable indoor air quality at the quantity of outside air scheduled with the technology submitted. The manufacturer shall provide independent test data on a previous installation in a similar application, that proves compliance to ASHRAE 62 and the accuracy of the calculations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for ion generators including:

1. Schedule of plasma generators indicating unit designation, number of each type required for each unit/application.

2. Data sheet for each type of plasma generator, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, sizes, and mounting details.

3. Performance data for each type of plasma device furnished.4. Indoor Air Quality calculations using the formulas within ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 to

validate acceptable indoor air quality at the quantity of outside air scheduled (when projects are designed with outside air reduction).

5. Product drawings detailing all physical, electrical and control requirements.

B. Operating & Maintenance Data: Submit O&M data and recommended spare parts lists.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in factory fabricated shipping containers. Identify on outside of container type of product and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending.

B. Store in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.

C. Store indoors and in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendation for storage.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Equipment shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in material and workmanship. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner to replace for the Owner any defective workmanship, equipment, or material which has been furnished under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the System at Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The air purification system(s) shall be of the size, type, arrangement and capacity indicated and required by the unit furnished and shall be of the manufacturers specified.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Plasma Air.



C. All other Suppliers of comparable products requesting prior approval shall:

1. Submit for prior approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 01 00.2. In addition, manufacturers submitting for prior approval for Bi-Polar Ionization must as part of

the prior approval request provide their ASHRAE 62.1-2007 calculations that prove conformance to the ASHRAE Standard with the reduction of outside air to the scheduled values. A letter on the manufacturer’s letterhead requesting prior approval must accompany the request for prior approval stating their calculations are ASHRAE compliant. A third party validation study performed on a previous installation of the same application shall also be included.

2.2 BI-POLAR IONIZATION DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Each piece of air handling equipment, so designated on the plans, details, equipment schedules and/or specifications shall contain a Plasma Generator with Bi-polar Ionization output as described here within.

B. The Bi-polar Ionization system shall be capable of:

1. Effectively killing microorganisms downstream of the bi-polar ionization equipment (mold, bacteria, virus, etc.).

2. Controlling gas phase contaminants generated from human occupants, building structure, furnishings and outside air contaminants.

3. Capable of reducing static space charges.4. Effectively reducing space particle counts.

C. The bi-polar ionization system shall operate in a manner such that equal amounts of positive and negative ions are produced. Uni-polar ion devices shall not be acceptable.

1. Air exchange rates may vary through the full operating range of a constant volume or VAV system. The quantity of air exchange shall not be increased due to requirements of the air purification system.

2. Velocity Profile: The air purification device shall not have maximum velocity profile.

D. Humidity: Plasma Generators shall not require preheat protection when the relative humidity of the entering air exceeds 85%. Relative humidity from 0 - 100%, condensing, shall not cause damage, deterioration or dangerous conditions within the air purification system.

E. Equipment Requirements:

1. Electrode Specifications (Bi-polar Ionization):

a. Each Plasma Generator with Bi-polar Ionization output shall include the required number of electrodes and power generators sized to the air handling equipment capacity. Bi-polar ionization tubes manufactured of glass and steel mesh shall not be acceptable due to replacement requirements, maintenance, performance output reduction over time, ozone production and corrosion.

b. Electrodes shall be energized when the main unit disconnect is turned on and the fan is operating.

c. Manufacture shall demonstrate that no voltage potential exists due to exposed electrical components.



F. Air Handler Mounted Units:

1. Where so indicated on the plans and/or schedules Plasma Generator(s) shall be supplied and installed. The mechanical contractor shall mount the Plasma Generator and associated power supplies. All interconnecting wiring shall be UL and NEC NFPA 70 approved. Electrical contractor shall provide a 120V circuit to the ion generators.

G. Ionization Requirements:

1. Plasma Generators with Bi-polar ionization output shall be capable of controlling gas phase contaminants and shall be provided for all equipment listed above.

a. The Bi-polar ionization system shall consist of Bi-Polar Plasma Generator and power supply. The Bi-polar system shall be installed where indicated on the plans or specified to be installed. The device shall be capable of being powered by 110VAC to 208VAC to 240VAC without the use of an external transformer. Ionization systems requiring isolation transformers shall not be acceptable.

b. Ionization Output: The ionization output shall be controlled such that an equal number of positive and negative ions are produced. Imbalanced levels shall not be acceptable.

c. Ionization output from each electrode shall be a minimum of 15 million ions/cc when tested at 2” from the ionization generator.

2. Ozone Generation:

a. The operation of the electrodes or Bi-polar ionization units shall conform to UL 867-2007 with respect to ozone generation.

H. Electrical Requirements:

1. Wiring, conduit and junction boxes shall be installed within housing plenums in accordance with NEC NFPA 70. Plasma Generator shall accept an electrical service of 115 VAC to 240VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz.

I. Control Requirements:

1. All Plasma Generators shall have internal short circuit protection, overload protection, and automatic fault reset.

2. The installing contractor shall mount and wire the Plasma device within the air handling unit specified or as shown or the plans. The contractor shall follow all manufacturer IOM instructions during installation.

3. Units shall be provided with external ion detector for proof that unit is generating ions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all air systems until the owner accepts the building (Owner Acceptance).

3.2 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION: PLASMA GENERATOR WITH BI-POLAR IONIZATION

A. All equipment shall be assembled and installed in a workman like manner to the satisfaction of the owner, architect, and engineer.



B. Any material damaged by handling, water or moisture shall be replaced, by the mechanical contractor, at no cost to the owner.

C. All equipment shall be protected from dust and damage on a daily basis throughout construction.

3.3 TESTING

A. Provide the manufacturers recommended electrical tests.

3.4 COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

A. A manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide start-up supervision and training of owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment.



HEATING COILS: ELECTRIC DUCT 23 54 17 - 1

SECTION 23 54 17 - HEATING COILS: ELECTRIC DUCT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Provide factory assembled and prewired electric duct heaters where indicated. Heater capacities, sizes and operating characteristics shall be as scheduled on drawings or as indicated in other sections.



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data on heater sizes; required clearances; direction of air flow; control box construction and dimensions; power and control wiring (both factory and field); operating and safety controls; and capacities and operating characteristics.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS

A. Equipment items listed in the schedule on the drawings are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality, performance, and type of equipment. Equal products, complying with the required installation shown on the plans and with these specifications, by the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Brasch2. Tennessee Plastics3. Indeeco4. Electric Heaters Division of I.T.E.5. Valley Industries6. Dell



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Each heater shall be UL listed for zero clearance, open coil slip-in type for duct mounting. Sizes, direction of air flow, mounting position, electrical characteristics, and heating capacities shall be as indicated.

1. Meet all applicable requirements of current NEC.2. UL listed including all built-in components.3. Be entirely suitable for installation in the indicated locations (ductwork or air handling

unit(s) as applicable).4. Coordinated with the specified requirements of the mechanical system control system.

2.2 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Galvanized or aluminized steel frame and terminal box with hinged cover.

B. Maximum watt density of 35 watts per square inch of resistance wire surface area (unless otherwise specified).

C. Terminals recessed into air stream 1-1/4 inches minimum.

D. Stainless steel resistance coil terminals and nuts.

E. Iron free resistance wire of 80% nickel and 20% chromium.

F. Reinforced resistance wire bracket supports spaced no greater than four inches apart with stiffening ribs and gussets.

G. Securely positioned terminal insulators and bracket bushings of high quality ceramic.

H. Dielectrically tested for 1000 volts plus twice the rated voltage of 2000 volts, whichever is greater.

I. Heat limiter in each energized heating element power line.

J. Balanced three phase delta connected load if three phase heaters are specified.

K. Insulated terminal box to prevent condensation.

L. Full fine break mercury contactors which will break all ungrounded conductors (note horizontal, vertical or oblique position of each heater assembly as shown on drawings).

M. Transformer with primary fusing if control voltage is different from supply voltage.

N. Overcurrent protection consisting of automatic circuit breaker(s) each installed in accord with NEC requirements.

O. Manual reset thermal cutout in series with a disc type, automatic reset thermal cutout for primary protection, and heat limiters in the heating element power lines to de-energize the elements if the primary cutout fails. Devices shall be serviceable through the terminal box without having to remove heater from duct.



P. Control terminals and power terminals.

Q. Pneumatic-electric switches (one per heater step) when control signal is pneumatic.

R. Built-in or remote pressure type air flow switch. Install in series with automatic reset thermal cutout.

S. Factory mounted integral disconnect switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Arrange and install heater to provide uniform heating of air stream.

B. Properly and firmly support in each location.

3.2 PLACEMENT

A. Heater locations shall be essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment actually approved for installation on this project. Heaters and all controls shall be arranged for horizontal or vertical, top, side or bottom mounting as indicated on drawings. Heater installation shall conform to all governing codes as to clearances, disconnect means, wiring, and like items.

B. Support: Provide duct hangers, and specified in section entitled "Ductwork", immediately adjacent to both sides of heater at both sides of the duct.

C. Duct Openings: Shall be accurately cut, properly reinforced, and gasketed as required for an air tight installation. Insulation shall be finished up to the control box in such a manner as not to compromise service access to heater and provide a proper vapor seal at the edge of the insulation.

3.3 CONTROL COORDINATION

A. Coordinate and provide all items necessary for each heater to operate in accord with the control system sequences and methodology described in other sections of this division.

3.4 TEST AND BALANCE

A. All heater performance shall be certified by test and balance procedures as specified in section covering testing and balancing.


A. Contractor shall protect the heaters from damage from the time of their receipt until final acceptance and shall thoroughly clean the complete heater (including interior of control box) of all dirt and construction debris prior to requesting final inspection. Control box, access door, elements, control and like items which become damaged during the course of



construction shall be required to "as new" condition or shall be replaced with new material or equipment components.

3.6 WIRING DIAGRAMS

A. Provide complete wiring diagram furnished by the heating coil system manufacturer to the mechanical systems control manufacturer and the electrical contractor. This wiring diagram shall completely indicate in full detail all electrical and control wiring requirements, terminals, etc., necessary to allow the control manufacturer and electrical contractor to completely coordinate their respective wiring portions of the heating coil system installation.



AIR HANDLING UNITS, CENTRAL STATION, MODULAR 23 73 13 - 1

SECTION 23 73 13 - AIR HANDLING UNITS, CENTRAL STATION, MODULAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install modular central station air handling units of the types, sizes, and capacities indicated.


A. Refer to the section "General Mechanical Provisions" for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete performance data at the scheduled operating conditions; dimensions; weights; fan performance curves, airside pressure losses; waterside pressure losses; water quantities; coil descriptions; and unit inlet, discharge and radiated sound power levels, by octave bands, at the stated conditions; and a complete schedule worked up by unit number.

1.5 CERTIFICATION

A. Equipment performance ratings shall be certified as follows:

1. Fans: AMCA Bulletin 210 or ARI Standard 430.2. Coils: ARI Standard 410.

1.6 MANUFACTURER


1. Trane2. Carrier3. Temtrol



PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

A. Units shall be configured of standard modules arranged in sequence in direction of air flow as required to meet project requirements. Modules shall generally include, but not be limited to, the following as applicable to each air handling unit’s individual requirements:

1. Intake module.2. Mixing/Filter-Mixing Box module.3. Filter module(s).4. Inspection and/or access module(s).5. Coil module(s).6. Fan module.7. Discharge plenum module(s).8. Diffuser module.9. Internal or external face and bypass module.10. Multizone or double-duct coil section.

Modules shall comply with the requirements of the following component descriptions as appropriate to the configuration of the individual module.

B. Unit layout and configuration shall be as defined in project plans and schedule.

C. Provide unit mounting legs to support all sections of unit and raise unit for proper trapping. Contractor will be responsible for providing a housekeeping pad when unit mounting device is not of sufficient height to properly trap unit. Unit mounting devices not constructed of galvanized steel shall be chemically cleaned and coated with both a rust-inhibiting primer and finished coat of rust-inhibiting enamel.

2.2 MODULE CASINGS

A. Unit shall be constructed of a complete structural frame with removable panels. Unit manufacturer shall ship separate segments so unit can be broken down for ease of installation in tight spaces. The entire air handler shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Casing finished to meet ASTMB 117 250-hour salt-spray test. The removal of side panels shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. All removable panels shall be gasketed to minimize air leakage. All doors shall have gasketing around full perimeter to prevent air leakage. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all other framework that is needed to properly support the unit.

B. Construct casing sections capable of operating from -4"wg to +6"wg.

C. Hinged access doors shall be available in all sections to allow easy access to drain pan, coil(s), motor, drive components and bearings for cleaning, inspection, and maintenance. At a minimum, doors shall be provided in filter, upstream of cooling coil, downstream of cooling coil and fan sections. Removable access panels in lieu of doors are not acceptable.

D. Access doors shall be double wall construction to prevent damage to insulation during routine maintenance.

E. Access panels and doors shall be fully removable without the use of specialized tools to allow complete access of all interior surfaces.



F. Door hardware shall be surface mounted to minimize penetrations in the door casing that could lead to air leakage paths.

G. All joints between exterior panels and structural frames, as well as joints between module frames, shall be properly sealed and gasketed to provide an air seal.

H. Panels shall be double-wall construction to facilitate cleaning of the unit interior. The interior wall shall be constructed of solid, galvanized steel. Thermal resistance (R-value) shall be 8.33 ft2-hr-F/BTU or better.

2.3 FANS

A. Provide fans of type and class as specified on the schedule. Fan shafts shall be solid, coated with a rust-inhibiting coating, and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. All fans shall be statically and dynamically tested by the manufacturer for vibration and alignment as an assembly at the operating RPM to meet design specifications. Fans controlled by variable frequency drives shall be statically and dynamically tested for vibration and alignment at speeds between 25% and 100% of design RPM. If fans are not factory-tested for vibration and alignment, the contractor shall be responsible for cost and labor associated with field balancing and certified vibration performance. Fan wheels shall be keyed to fan shafts to prevent slipping.

B. Provide grease lubricated ball bearings selected for L-50 200,000-hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Greasable bearings shall have lubrication lines extended to the drive side of the unit. Lubrication lines shall be a clear, high-pressure, polymer to aid in visual inspection. Extend both grease lubrication lines to drive side of unit and rigidly attach to drive side bearing support with zerk fittings. If extended lubrication lines are not provided, manufacturer shall provide permanently lubricated bearing with engineering calculations for proof of bearing life.

C. Fans shall be mounted on isolation bases. Internally-mounted motor shall be on the same isolation base. Fan and motor shall be internally isolated with spring isolators. Flexible canvas ducts shall be installed between fan and unit casing to ensure complete isolation. Flexible canvas ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181 requirements.

D. Fan modules shall have a access door located on the drive side of the unit to allow inspection and maintenance of the fan, motor, and drive components. Construct door(s) per Section 2.03 paragraphs D, E, and F.

E. Fans for VAV applications shall be factory inverter duty balanced prior to shipment.

2.4 MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall be installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall be designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer for that fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow requirements change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have motors field installed by the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with installation of motor and drive, alignment of sheaves and belts, run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly.

B. Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, open drip-proof, E+.



C. Motors shall be selected to operate continuously at 104 F (40 C) ambient without tripping of overloads. Motors shall have a +/- 10 percent voltage utilization range to protect against voltage variation. Motors shall be in compliance with EPACT when applicable.

D. V-Belt Drive shall be fixed pitch rated at 1.5 times the motor nameplate.

E. Manufacturer shall provide for each fan a nameplate with the following information to assist air balance contractor in start up and service personnel in maintenance:

1. Fan and motor sheave part number2. Fan and motor bushing part number3. Number of belts and belt part numbers4. Fan design RPM and motor HP5. Belt tension and deflection6. Center distance between shafts

2.5 COILS

A. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casing to ensure that if condensate forms on the header or return bends, it is captured by the drainpan under the coil.

B. Coils shall be manufactured with plate fins to minimize water carryover and maximize airside thermal efficiency. Fin tube holes shall have drawn and belled collars to maintain consistent fin spacing to ensure performance and air pressure drop across the coil as scheduled. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded and bonded to fin collars for maximum thermal conductivity. Use of soldering or tinning during the fin-to-tube bonding process is not acceptable due to the inherent thermal stress and possible loss of bonding at that joint.

C. Construct coil casings of stainless steel. End supports and tube sheets shall have belled tube holes to minimize wear of the tube wall during thermal expansion and contraction of the tube.

D. All coils shall be completely cleaned prior to installation into the air handling unit. Complete fin bundle in direction of airflow shall be degreased and steam cleaned to remove any lubricants used in the manufacturing of the fins, or dirt that may have accumulated, in order to minimize the chance for water carryover.

E. On stacked cooling coils, intermediate stainless steel drain pans shall be installed between the coils. Intermediate drain pans shall have drop tubes to guide condensate to the main drain pan, thus preventing flooding of lower coils that would result in moisture carryover.

F. Where indicated on the schedule coils shall be provided with a factory applied heresite corrosion protection coating. Manufacture shall guarantee no moisture carryover when coating is applied. Field applied coating is unacceptable.

G. Hydronic Coils:

1. Supply and return header connections shall be clearly labeled on outside of units such that direction of coil water-flow is counter to direction of unit air-flow.

2. Coils shall be proof tested to 300 psig and leak tested to 200 psig air pressure under water.

3. Headers shall be constructed of round copper pipe or cast iron.



4. Tubes shall be 1/2 inch O.D. or 5/8” O.D minimum .016 inch thick copper. Fins shall be aluminum.

2.6 BASE-LEVEL DRAIN PANS

A. Insulation shall be encased between exterior and interior walls. Units with cooling coils shall have stainless steel drain pans under complete cooling coil section that extend beyond the air-leaving side of the coil to ensure capture of all condensate in section. Cooling coil drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes, pitched toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage when unit is installed level and trapped per manufacturer's requirements. See section 2.05, paragraph E for specifications on intermediate drain pans between cooling coils.

B. Units with heating coils shall have a galvanized steel drain pan under complete heating coil section sloped in 2 planes and pitched toward drain connections to ensure proper drainage during cleaning and to capture water in the event of a coil failure.

C. All drain pan connections supplied by unit manufacturer including, piping, and piping connections extending from stainless steel drain pans shall be constructed of stainless steel. The contractor is responsible to ensure the unit is installed level, trapped in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and visually inspected to ensure proper drainage of condensate.

2.7 FILTERS

A. Provide factory-fabricated filter section(s) of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Filter section(s) shall have filter guides and access door extending the full height of the casing to facilitate filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with Section 2.03, paragraphs D, E, and F. Provide filter blockoffs as required to prevent air bypass around filters.

B. Final Filters:

Thickness: 2-inchesEfficiency: MERV 12Media Type: Pleated mediaAccess: Removable from one side of unitArrangement: Provided as defined by the drawings.

2.8 DAMPERS

A. All dampers, with the exception of external bypass and multizones (if scheduled), shall be internally mounted. Dampers shall be premium ultra low leak and located as scheduled. Dampers shall be Ruskin CD60 double-skin airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage and pressure drop. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 CFM/square foot at one inch water gauge and 9 CFM/square foot at 4 inches water gauge. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Publication 500. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished.

B. Where required, provide a factory-mounted ASHRAE Standard 62 airflow monitoring and control station in the outdoor air opening of the mixing box. The monitor shall track a variable outside air quantity for ventilation demand flow control and ventilation flow documentation.



The airflow monitoring station shall be factory-mounted, factory-calibrated, and installed per the airflow monitor manufacturer's recommendations.

1. The air handling unit mixing box shall also include a modulating outside air damper mounted in series with the air flow monitor.

2. All linkages, crank arms, jack shafts and mounting hardware shall be provided.3. The airflow monitoring station shall be calibrated to measure a variable airflow from 15%

of nominal airhandler cfm up to 100% of design airflow, maintaining an accuracy of plus or minus five (5%) percent of actual cfm, for air measuring between -40F up to +158F. Monitoring station shall compensate for outside air temperature fluctuations that affect mass flow rate of air.

4. Manufacturer shall submit test data to demonstrate compliance.5. The airflow monitoring station shall provide a proportional output velocity signal (2-10

vdc). The velocity sensor shall have an automatic zeroing function and shall be programmed to recalibrate the device's transducer a minimum of once per day to ensure continuous accuracy of airflow measurements. The monitor manufacturer shall provide to the Building Automation System (BAS) contractor a certified conversion table for the signal provided.

2.9 ACCESS SECTIONS

A. Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fans sections shall be provided. The unit shall be installed for proper access. Procedure for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit shall be included in the maintenance manual. Access section shall have double wall, hinged, removable access doors on one side of sections. Construct doors per Section 2.03 paragraphs D, E, and F.

2.10 OVERALL CONSTRUCTION

A. Shall be low, medium or high pressure as recommended by the manufacturer for operation at the indicated conditions.

2.11 UNIT COMPONENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS

A. General: Refer to drawings and schedules for components and configurations of units. In general and unless exceptions are indicated, unit assemblies shall consist of the following items in series in direction of air flow:

B. Draw-through Type Units:

1. Mixing box / filter module.2. Coil module(s).3. Access module.4. Plenum fan module.

2.12 CONSTRUCTION PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS

A. Each unit shall be specifically cataloged, rated and constructed for operation at the total static pressure conditions of the system in which the unit is utilized and shall be recommended by the manufacturer for the specific pressure and operating conditions encountered on this project.




A. Units shall be horizontal or vertical configuration (as applicable).

B. Cooling coils shall not have face velocities in excess of 550 fpm unless otherwise indicated on drawing schedule (in such case, velocity obtained from drawing schedule shall be upper limit).

C. Units shall be provided which will perform as indicated with proper consideration of any correction factors which are applicable to unit casing configuration.

D. Heating coils shall be located in either or both the reheat and preheat positions as scheduled.

E. Pipe all coils for counterflow heat transfer.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT

A. Air handling equipment shall be located essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement of the unit shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the units approved for actual installation on this project.

3.2 WIRING

A. Where units utilize internal drives, conduit penetrations shall be provided by the manufacturer. The conduit openings shall be located on the drive side and positioned so as not to compromise access to any portion of the unit. The opening shall be provided with effective seals and the edges of the internal insulation shall be properly sealed.

3.3 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. Refer to other sections for airside sound control and vibration control. Mount isolators using height saving brackets where required to reduce operating height of unit to suit space available.


A. Supply and return ducts shall be connected to their respective air handler using flexible connectors. Connectors shall be properly installed so that they are not in tension and are aligned with their respective ducts.

3.5 PIPING

A. Refer to sections describing connected piping. Plug unused drain connections.



AIR HANDLING UNITS, SPLIT SYSTEM 23 81 27 - 1

SECTION 23 81 27 - AIR HANDLING UNITS, SPLIT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install medium duty factory packaged air handling units with direct expansion refrigerant coils of the types, sizes, and capacities indicated.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete performance data at the scheduled operating conditions, dimensions; weights; fan performance curves, airside pressure losses; waterside pressure losses; coil descriptions; and fan discharge and radiated sound power levels, by octave bands, at the stated conditions.

1.3 CERTIFICATION

A. Equipment performance ratings shall be certified as follows:

1. Fans: AMCA Bulletin 210 or ARI Standard 430.2. Coils: ARI Standard 210-79.

1.4 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of design: Similar to Trane Series TWE or Climate Changer Series, or as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Acceptable: Carrier, Trane, York, Weatherking.

1.5 COMPATIBILITY

A. Each unit must be compatible with the condensing units(s) to which it is matched. This includes unit arrangement/configuration, capacity, associated controls, piping and all other connected equipment to which the unit and its components are interfaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CASING

A. Unit casings shall be fabricated of mill galvanized steel reinforced with formed "hat" channels or steel angle iron frames and bracing to provide a rigid assembly. Casing shall be provided with removable panels for access to and removal of coils, dampers and fans in external units. Provide hinged access door for access to and removal of fans and drives in internal drive units.



2.2 DRAIN PAN

A. Unit drain pan shall be of the double wall internally insulated type with welded seams. Drain pan in draw-thru units shall extend under both the fan and coils sections and in blow-thru units under the entire coil and plenum section.

2.3 DIRECT EXPANSION REFRIGERANT COOLING COILS

A. Provide direct expansion refrigerant cooling coil of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded thereto, circuited to provide proper refrigerant velocities, properly matched with compressor-condenser assembly for proper operation, with expansion valves selected for optimum refrigerant flow from 20% to 100% full load.

2.4 ELECTRIC HEATING COILS

A. Where electric heating coils are shown or scheduled to be integral with the air handling unit, each such coil shall be as follows:

1. Factory assembled and prewired. Heater capacities, sizes and operating characteristics shall be as scheduled on drawings or as indicated in other sections.

2. Meet all applicable requirements of the current NEC.3. UL listed including all built-in components.4. Coordinated with the specified requirements of the mechanical system control system.5. Provided in capacity control steps indicated or scheduled. If not otherwise indicated,

heaters over 10 KW shall have heating elements sequenced on and off in 5 KW increments, and shall be wired for 2 stage operation. All heaters shall be equipped with both thermal and current overload devices, and the required heating and cooling system controls.

2.5 FANS

A. Fans shall be individually selected to best suit the air quantities and pressures scheduled. Fans handling less than eighteen thousand (18,000) cubic feet per minute, at four and one-half (4-1/2) inches or less static pressure may be of the forward curved blade centrifugal type. Fans handling eighteen thousand (18,000) cubic feet per minute or more or operating at more than four and one-half (4-1/2) inches static pressure shall be of the backward inclined airfoil blade centrifugal type. All fans shall be double width, double inlet type. Fans and shafts shall be selected to operate not less than twenty-five percent (25%) below their first critical speed, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to the shafts. Shafts shall be of the hollow large diameter type with tapered and strengthened ends where they extend entirely through the casing and shall be solid steel for fans having drives within the casing. Shafts shall be turned and shall be ground and polished at bearing and fan mounting points.

2.6 BEARINGS

A. Provide regreaseable ball types selected for an average life of 200,000 hours at design operating conditions. Bearings shall have grease line extended to the drive side of the fan casing of the drive side of the fan scroll for internal drive fans.



2.7 DRIVES AND MOTORS

A. Provide guards for internal and external drive fans.

2.8 INSULATION

A. The entire air handling unit casing (including accessory sections), including structural frame and channels shall be insulated from contact with the air stream. Insulate using one inch (1") thick, three (3) pound per cubic foot density fiberglass duct liner having a neoprene stabilized face toward the air stream. The insulation shall be secured using a full coverage insulation and adhesives shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

2.9 FILTERS

A. See section describing air filters.

2.10 OVERALL CONSTRUCTION

A. Shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for operation at the indicated conditions.


A. Be horizontal or vertical configuration (as applicable).

B. Cooling coils shall not have face velocities in excess of 500 fpm unless otherwise indicated on drawings schedule (in such case, velocity obtained from drawings schedule shall be upper limit).

C. Units shall be provided which will perform as indicated with proper consideration of any correction factors which are applicable to system unit casing configuration.

D. Heating coils, if required, shall be located in reheat position unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT

A. Air handling equipment shall be located essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement of the unit shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the units approved for actual installation on this project.

3.2 WIRING

A. Where units utilize internal drives, conduit penetrations shall be provided by the manufacturer. The conduit openings shall be located on the drive side and positioned so as not to compromise access to any portion of the unit. The opening shall be provided with effective seals and the edges of the internal insulation shall be properly sealed.



3.3 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL

A. Refer to other sections for airside sound control and vibration control. Mount isolators using height saving brackets where required to reduce operating height of unit to suit space available.


A. Supply and return ducts and combination filter mixing boxes shall be connected to their respective air handler using flexible connectors. Connectors shall be properly installed so that they are not in tension and are aligned with their respective ducts.

3.5 HOUSEKEEPING PAD

A. Provide 6 inch high reinforced concrete (with 10 x 10 WWP) housekeeping pad for each floor mounted unit. The housekeeping pad shall extend 6 inches beyond the unit base in all directions and shall be continuous beneath the base. Pads shall have chamfered edges and shall be poured and finished smooth and level.


A. Properly connect all piping.

B. Allow adequate space for all service and operational clearances necessary.



BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 01 00 - 1

SECTION 26 01 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

B. Coordination of work between mechanical and electrical trades is covered in Division-23 Section “GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to all sections of Division-26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division-01.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Install all work in accordance with the applicable requirements of the latest edition of the following:

1. Florida Building Code2. Florida Fire Prevention Code3. National Electric Code (NFPA 70)4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)5. Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 69A-58

B. All electrical materials, installation and systems shall meet the requirements of the following standards, including the latest addenda and amendments:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Associations (NEMA)4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)6. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL)7. Electronic Industry Association (EIA)

C. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to comply with the applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, and standards. Where discrepancies occur, notify the Architect in writing, and ask for interpretation. Correct any installation that fails to comply with the applicable codes and standards at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. All materials shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L. listed, bear the U.L. label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognized Electrical Testing Agency. Where no labeling or listing service is available for certain types of equipment, test data shall be submitted to prove to the Engineer that equipment meets or exceeds available standards.



1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and make all payments for permits, meters and inspections required. At the completion of the project and before final acceptance of the electrical work, provide evidence of final inspection and approval by the authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical products specified, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical work similar to that required for this project.

1.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. The following items shall be equipped with nameplates: All motors, motor starters, motor-control centers, pushbutton stations, control panels, time switches, disconnect switches, panelboards, circuit breakers, contactors.

B. Nameplates shall adequately describe the function of the particular equipment involved. Nameplates for panelboards and switchboards shall include the panel designation, branch (normal or emergency), voltage and phase of the supply. For example, "Panel A, Emergency Branch, 480Y/277V, 3-phase, 4-wire."

C. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic, black front and back with white core, with 3/8" high lettering etched through the outer covering. White engraved letters on black background. Attach with plated self-tapping screws or brass bolts.

D. All junction box covers shall be hand marked with a 1/8" wide permanent black marking pen, indicating panel and circuit numbers contained, or system contained, i.e., fire alarm, telephone, etc.

1.7 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected, and architectural room elevations.

1.8 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.



E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

G. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with local utility services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connections for each service.

1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of electrical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Do not cut any structural members without written approval from the Architect of Record and School District of St Lucie County.

C. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.

D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations.

E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.

F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work;2. Remove and replace defective Work;3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents;4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing;5. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.6. Install electrical work in existing facilities.

1.10 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division-01 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.

B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed.



1.11 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and the Division-01 for requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions. Where a listing of acceptable manufacturers has been given, use one of those manufacturers given only.

1.12 PRODUCT LISTING

A. Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project.

B. Provide all information requested.

C. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division-01.

D. When two or more items of the same material or equipment are required they shall be of the same manufacturer, i.e., panelboards, motor starters, transformers, etc. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in Work, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

1.14 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to the Division-01 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division-01.

B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used.



1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to the Division-01 Section; PROJECT CLOSEOUT or OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

1.16 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Divisions-26, 27 & 28, into a separate set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.

1.17 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division-01 Section; PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps.

1.18 TEMPORARY POWER

A. Provide and pay for all temporary electrical service as required for construction.

B. Provide all temporary lighting and power distribution as required for construction. All temporary electrical work shall be in accordance with the N.E.C.

1.19 ELECTRONIC FILES

A. CADD files will be available on a limited basis to qualified firms at the Architects prerogative. Recipients are cautioned that these files may not accurately show actual conditions as constructed. Users are responsible to verify actual field conditions. These files are not intended to be used as shop drawings.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceways and cables.2. Sleeve seals.3. Grout.4. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.



2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.



G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 26 05 19 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.



2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. Calpico, Inc.3. Metraflex Co.4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.



D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

J. Manufactured wiring, including but not limited to Reloc, is not permitted on any School District of St Lucie County projects.



3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.



3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS





B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.



B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch in diameter, by 20 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned, stranded copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade, or bury 12” above ductbank when installed as part of the ductbank.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green, with at least three bands of green.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted pressure clamp.2. Underground Connections: Exothermic welded connectors, except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted pressure clamps.4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.8. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment

grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.



B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.



1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.



B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 1000 kVA and Less: 5 ohms.2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.



2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated and stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.3) Hilti Inc.4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.



B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Sections "Cast-in-Place Concrete” and “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.2. Fittings for EMT: Steel Set Screw type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.



B. LFNC: UL 1660.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS


1. Hoffman.2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.



b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.


a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.e. Panduit Corp.f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal for slab on slab on grade or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

I. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RNC identified for such use.3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."



E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.



2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. The use of RNC Conduits of 2” or smaller is permitted to be installed under the floor slabs of any building of tilt wall construction. These conduits will be terminated at the finish floor line with an approved adapter and then transitioned to EMT, IMC or RMC. Conduits that enter into bottomless gutters installed under panels and on top of house keeping pads can be RNC regardless of size.



7. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Painted Junction Boxes Couplings for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: All conduit system junction boxes (except those subject to view in public areas) are to be color coded as listed:

COLOR CODE FOR JUNCTION BOXES

Emergency Power 277/480 volt OrangeEmergency Power 120/208 volt Light OrangeFire Alarm RedNormal Power 277/480 volt Leather BrownNormal Power 120/208 volt Glossy BlackFiber Optics Safety PurpleSound System Safety YellowIntercom True BlueComputer/Data Bright GoldTV Glossy WhiteBAS VoiletSecurity/CCTV Beige

D. Painted Color Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Conduits longer than 20 feet are to be painted with the above listed color paint bands 20 feet on center. Paint band is to be 4” in length, applied around entire conduit. Where conduits are parallel on conduit racking, paint bands are to be evenly aligned. Paint is to be neatly applied and uniform. Paint boxes and raceways prior to installation or tape conduits and surrounding surfaces to avoid overspray. Paint overspray is to be removed.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.



2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Single Conductor Control Wires: Identify with pre-printed sleeve type heat-shrink marker, with wire number, at each termination.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.



E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following example legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic, or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.



E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Panelboard engraved labels shall be mechanically fastened using rivets or screws.

H. Provide typed panel schedule for new panels or when circuits are added to existing panels.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.2. Power.3. UPS.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.



d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control



panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Follow the Gulfstream panelboard labeling scheme.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.d. Switchboards.e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.g. Enclosed switches.h. Enclosed circuit breakers.i. Enclosed controllers.j. Variable-speed controllers.k. Power transfer equipment.l. Power-generating units.m. Monitoring and control equipment.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches.2. Outdoor photoelectric switches.3. Indoor occupancy sensors.4. Lighting contactors.5. Emergency shunt relay.

B. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



C. Operation and maintenance data.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

1. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: As indicated on drawings.2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.3. Program: 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that

overrides the weekly operation on holidays.4. Program: 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each

day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.



5. Programs: 8 channels; each channel shall be individually programmable with 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule.

6. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels.

7. Astronomic Time: All channels.8. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES



B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,

and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

C. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA to operate connected load, relay, or contactor coils; complying with UL 773.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

2. Time Delay: 30-second minimum, to prevent false operation.3. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or:


D. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.



1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when

selected lighting level is present.

E. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

2.4 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSORS (PIR)



B. Performance Requirements: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 130 deg F, rated as raintight according to UL 773A.

1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box.b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.



4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc; keep lighting off during daylight hours.

C. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

D. Detection Coverage: Up to 35 feet, with a field of view of 180 degrees.

E. Lighting Fixture Mounted Sensor: Suitable for switching 300 W of tungsten load at 120- or 277-V ac.

F. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

1. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Square D; Schneider Electric.2. Watt Stopper (The).

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.4. Provide with control and pilot devices as scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified

for the enclosure.

2.6 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY


1. Lighting Control and Design, Inc.

B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.

1. Coil Rating: 277 V.



2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

B. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.



LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1

SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.2. Buck-boost transformers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.



1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated voltage.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

K. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.



2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.

B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Nameplates are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."





2. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

a. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

b. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

c. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.



PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.c. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X.d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Aluminum.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin plated aluminum.2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.



D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric or comparable product by the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. External Control-Power Source: 24-V control circuit.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric or comparable product by the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with fully rated interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.



3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on position.

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.



D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.3. Provide infrared scanning and submit a report for all panelboards.

C. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Snap switches.3. Wall-switch sensors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way).c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way).d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221L.



b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.c. Leviton; 1221-2L.d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP.b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW.c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200.

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flap-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.



3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.



E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.



FUSES 26 28 13 - 1

SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches, panelboards, switchboards, and motor-control centers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.2. Edison Fuse, Inc.3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Class RK5, time delay.


FUSES 26 28 13 - 2

B. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

C. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers.4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current rating.4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used.



2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

B. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

2.3 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES

A. Bolted-Pressure Contact Switch: UL 977; operating mechanism shall use a rotary-mechanical-bolting action to produce and maintain high-clamping pressure on the switch blade after it engages the stationary contacts.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for

heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.



5. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system.

6. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

8. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

9. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

10. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4x.2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.

B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Infrared Scanning:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers included and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.



LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 19 - 1

SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires:

1. Downlight.2. Strip light.3. Surface mount, linear.4. Suspended, linear.5. Materials.6. Finishes.7. Luminaire support.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, arranged by designation.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.

C. Sample warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. Standards:

1. ENERGY STAR certified.2. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.3. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 to 4100 K depending on fixture selection.

D. Rated lamp life of 75,000 hours to L70.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

G. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac or 277 V ac.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

H. Housings:

1. Painted steel housing and heat sink.2. Painted finish.



2.2 DOWNLIGHT

A. Minimum 1,000 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lumens per watt.

B. Universal mounting bracket.

C. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

D. Optics:

1. Fixed lens.2. Medium light distribution.

2.3 STRIP LIGHT


B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.4 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR

A. Minimum 750 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lumens per watt.

B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.

2.5 SUSPENDED, LINEAR


2.6 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Housings:

1. Painted steel housing and heat sink.2. White painted finish.



2.7 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Supports: Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

D. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in stair well or attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to structural members.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

E. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120 inches in length.

2. Ceiling mount with pendant mount with 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120 inches in length.

3. Ceiling mount with hook mount.

F. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.



3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.2. Secure luminaire using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near

corners of luminaire.

H. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

I. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 1

SECTION 28 31 11 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit(s).2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.3. System smoke detectors.4. Heat detectors.5. Notification appliances.6. Magnetic door holders.7. Remote annunciators.8. Addressable interface device.9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.10. System printer.11. Voice Alarm Sub-system(s).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.3. Include battery-size calculations.4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. For fire-alarm system include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. Comply with the requirements of paragraph “Shop Drawings.”

2. For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

a. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.

b. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.



d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.7. Copy of NFPA 25.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for three years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within three years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system in a fuse cabinet adjacent to main fire

alarm control panel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Notifire, a Honeywell Company, NFS2640 networked system or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Fire-Lite; a Honeywell company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Smoke detectors.4. Duct smoke detectors.5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.7. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.8. Fire-extinguishing system operation.9. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.10. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.11. Record events in the system memory.12. Record events by the system printer.



C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.2. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.3. Duct smoke detector operation.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.6. Break in standby battery circuitry.7. Failure of battery charging.8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 640 minimum characters. .2. Keyboard: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.



C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style B.b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y.c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4.d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Serial Interfaces: Four RS-232 ports for printers and CRTs.3. EIA 485 ports: Four, minimum, for communication with other system components.4. Interface module(s) for Dual fiber-optic links between buildings.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a ANSI standard temporal pattern.

F. Elevator Recall:

1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.



J. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided as a special module that is part of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by

NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

K. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.



1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:






D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Manufacturers:



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gentex notification appliances or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Notifier, a Honeywell Companyb. Gamewell; a Honeywell company.c. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.d. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a flush grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

1. Catalog Number: Gentex GEC3 series

E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.7. Catalog Number: GES3 series.

F. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.4. Mounting: Flush.5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.6. Manufacturer: Wheellock

a. Low-range units: ET70 series.



b. High range units: ET90 series

G. Voice Speaker Clusters:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.2. Speaker Units: Rated 15 to 30 W. per unit3. Mounting: Pendant4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.5. Strobes: 177 cd6. Manufacturer: Wheellock Series STH

2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: LCD Alphanumeric display with operator keyboard and LED status indicators. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown or to shutdown AHUs and other fans .

2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.



B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.2. Programming device.3. LED display.4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.2. Address of the supervisory signal.3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power.5. Low battery.6. Abnormal test signal.7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.12 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

2.13 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device.2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.



B. Wiring Methods:

1. Enclose all wiring in metallic raceway within buildings and structures.2. Refer to Section RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS for type of

raceway required in different spaces and conditions.3. PVC80 conduit may be used for exterior underground raceway. Minimum depth-of-bury is

36.”4. Minimum raceway size is 3/4“ trade size.5. Line voltage conductors shall be solid copper conductors with 600 V-rated THWN

insulation. Provide #10 gauge minimum, with adjustments for long runs. Preferred initiation loop conductors are West Penn.

6. Signal circuits shall be #14 AWG THWN 19 strand copper.7. Annunciator Circuits shall be #16 AWG THWN 19 strand copper.8. Wire AWG sizes shall be adjusted to a larger size as required by the manufacturers’

voltage drop recommendations and the load served.9. Color code all conductors per BCSB standard:

Color Code: Positive Negative Audio/visual #14 AWG (THWN) +blue -yellow

Relay circuit #14 AWG (THWN) +purple -gray (NC)

Door holders #14 AWG (THWN) +brown -orange

Gas shutoff #14 AWG (THWN) +blue -yellow

24 – 28 VDC #14 AWG (THWN) +red -black

Automatic (non #14 AWG (THWN) +yellow -brown addressable)

Manual (non #14 AWG (THWN) +blue -purple

addressable)

10. All conductors shall be unspliced between devices. Make connections directly to device terminals.

11. Tee tapping of circuits is prohibited.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted.

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.



E. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

F. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

J. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

K. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.2. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.3. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.4. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.5. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.6. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-

reversal condition.7. Supervisory connections at fire-pump motor control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.



3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
